2010 Equinox

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-33
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-34 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-28 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-35 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-41 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Vehicle Data Recording and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-46 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-64 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-10

Introduction iii
Motors of Canada Limited” for

Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the Manufactured under license from

GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
CHEVROLET Emblem, the name double-D symbol are trademarks of
Equinox and the Equinox Emblem Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
are registered trademarks of 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
General Motors LLC. rights reserved.
This manual describes features that Manufactured under license under This product incorporates copyright
may or may not be on your specific U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; protection technology that is
vehicle either because they are 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; protected by U.S. patents and other
options that you did not purchase 6,487,535 & other U.S. and intellectual property rights. Use of
or due to changes subsequent to worldwide patents issued & this copyright protection technology
the printing of this owner manual. pending. DTS and DTS Digital must be authorized by Macrovision,
Please refer to the purchase Surround are registered trademarks and is intended for home and other
documentation relating to your and the DTS logos and Symbol are limited viewing uses only unless
specific vehicle to confirm each of trademarks of DTS, Inc. © otherwise authorized by
the features found on your vehicle. 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Macrovision. Reverse engineering
For vehicles first sold in Canada, Reserved. or disassembly is prohibited.
substitute the name “General
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25798562 C Third Printing 2010 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Canadian Vehicle Owners Danger, Warnings, and

Propriétaires Canadiens Cautions
A French language copy of this Warning messages found on vehicle
manual can be obtained from your labels and in this manual describe
dealer or from: hazards and what to do to avoid or
“Made for iPod” means that an reduce them.
electronic accessory has been On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du Danger indicates a hazard with a
designed to connect specifically high level of risk which will result in
to iPod and has been certified by concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante: serious injury or death.
the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. iPod is a Helm, Incorporated Warning or Caution indicates a
trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., P.O. Box 07130 hazard that could result in injury or
registered in the U.S. and other Detroit, MI 48207 death.
countries.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue { WARNING
française These mean there is something
www.helminc.com that could hurt you or other
people.
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.

Introduction v
Notice: This means there is M : This symbol is shown when I : Cruise Control
something that could result in you need to see your owner manual
property or vehicle damage. This for additional instructions or
d : Electronic Stability
would not be covered by the Control (ESC)
information.
vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when B : Engine Coolant Temperature
you need to see a service manual O : Exterior Lamps
for additional instructions or . : Fuel Gauge
information.
+ : Fuses
Vehicle Symbol Chart
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Here are some additional symbols Changer
that may be found on the vehicle
A circle with a slash through it is a
and what they mean. For more j : LATCH System Child
safety symbol which means “Do Restraints
Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let information on the symbol, refer to
this happen.” the index. * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
9 : Airbag Readiness Light : : Oil Pressure
Symbols # : Air Conditioning } : Power
The vehicle has components and ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) / : Remote Vehicle Start
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls > : Safety Belt Reminders
the text describing the operation or or OnStar 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
information relating to a specific $ : Brake System Warning Light M : Windshield Washer Fluid
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
" : Charging System

vi Introduction
2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-15
Windows Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Windows
Keys and Locks Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 1-13 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Mirrors Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls The key, that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE
or even make the vehicle move. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, transmitter to extend the key.
The windows will function with the can be used for the ignition and all Press the button and the key
keys in the ignition and children locks. blade to retract the key.
could be seriously injured or killed
See your dealer if a new key is
if caught in the path of a closing needed.
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children. Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System
on page 4‑39.

. Check the transmitter's battery.
Remote Keyless Entry See “Battery Replacement” later
(RKE) System in this section.
See Radio Frequency Statement on . If the transmitter is still not
page 12‑16 for information working correctly, see your
regarding Part 15 of the Federal dealer or a qualified technician
Communications Commission (FCC) for service.
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada. Remote Keyless Entry
Changes or modifications to (RKE) System Operation
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
authorization to use this equipment. transmitter will work up to 60 m RKE without Remote Start Shown
(195 feet) away from the vehicle.
If there is a decrease in the RKE The following may be available:
operating range: There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
. Check the distance. The transmitter. See Remote Keyless The turn signal indicators may flash
transmitter may be too far Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3. and/or the horn may sound to
from the vehicle. indicate locking, see “Remote
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
. Check the location. Other
Personalization on page 4‑34. If a
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock. If the driver
door is open when Q is pressed, all
doors lock except the driver door.
These settings can be modified.

See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” V (Remote Liftgate Release): Programming Transmitters to
under Vehicle Personalization on First press K, then press and hold the Vehicle
page 4‑34.
V to unlock the liftgate. For Only RKE transmitters programmed
Pressing Q may also arm the vehicles with the power liftgate, to this vehicle will work. If a
theft-deterrent system. See press and hold V until the liftgate transmitter is lost or stolen, a
Anti-Theft Alarm System on begins to move to open the liftgate. replacement can be purchased and
page 1‑12. programmed through your dealer.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic When the replacement transmitter is
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the Alarm): Press and release one programmed to this vehicle, all
driver door or all doors, see time to locate the vehicle. The remaining transmitters must also be
“Remote Door Unlock” under exterior lamps flash and the horn reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
Vehicle Personalization on chirps. Press and hold 7 for at least transmitters will no longer work
page 4‑34. The turn signal two seconds to sound the panic once the new transmitter is
indicators flash to indicate unlocking alarm. The horn sounds and the programmed.
has occurred. For more information
see “Remote Unlock Light turn signals flash until 7 is pressed
Battery Replacement
Feedback” under Vehicle again or the key is placed in the
Personalization on page 4‑34. ignition and turned to ON/RUN. Replace the battery if the “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” message
Pressing K may also disarm the / (Remote Vehicle Start): For displays in the DIC. See “Replace
theft-deterrent system. See vehicles with this feature, first press Battery in Remote Key” under Key
Anti-Theft Alarm System on Q then press and hold / to start and Lock Messages on page 4‑31.
page 1‑12. the engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See The battery is not rechargeable.
Remote Vehicle Start on page 1‑5 See your dealer to replace the
for additional information. battery.

Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which Extending Engine Run Time
can affect the performance of the For a 10-minute extension, repeat
The vehicle may have this feature transmitter, see Remote Keyless
that allows you to start the engine Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3 still running. The remote start can
from outside the vehicle. for additional information. be extended once.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This Starting the Engine Using Remote
button will be on the RKE When the remote start is extended,
Start the second 10 minutes will start
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start. To enable and disable remote To start the engine using the remote immediately.
start, see “Remote Vehicle Start” start feature: For example, if the engine has been
under Vehicle Personalization on running for five minutes, and
page 4‑34.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
10 minutes are added, the engine
2. Press and hold / for about will run for a total of 15 minutes.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
two seconds. The turn signal
control system will default to a A maximum of two remote starts or
lamps will briefly flash to confirm
heating or cooling mode depending remote start attempts are allowed
the vehicle has been started.
on the outside temperature during a between ignition cycles.
The parking lamps will turn on
remote start. Once the key is turned
and remain on as long as the The vehicle's ignition switch must
to ON/RUN, the system will turn on
engine is running. The vehicle's be turned to ON/RUN and then back
at the setting the vehicle was last
doors will be locked. to LOCK/OFF using the key, before
set to.
3. The key must be inserted and the remote start procedure can be
Laws in some local communities used again.
turned to ON/RUN before
may restrict the use of remote
driving.
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote The engine will shut off after
start to have the vehicle in view. 10 minutes unless a time
Check local regulations for any extension is done or the key is
requirements. inserted and turned to ON/RUN.

Shutting the Engine Off After a

. The oil pressure is low.
Remote Start . Two remote vehicle starts have WARNING (Continued)
To shut off the engine: already been used. . Young children who get into
. Press / until the parking lamps
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). unlocked vehicles may be
turn off. unable to get out. A child can
. Turn on the hazard warning
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
flashers. injuries or even death from
. Insert the key and turn it to ON/
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the
RUN and then back to Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
LOCK/OFF. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
Conditions in Which Remote Start . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
Will Not Work children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving your vehicle. Locking your
The remote vehicle start feature will doors can help prevent this
not operate if: vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a from happening.
. The key is in the ignition. crash is increased if the
To lock or unlock a door from the
. The hood or doors are not doors are not locked. So, all
outside of the vehicle, use the
closed. passengers should wear
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
safety belts properly and the
. The hazard warning flashers transmitter. Pull the handle once
doors should be locked
are on. from the inside to unlock the door,
whenever the vehicle is
and a second time to open it.
. There is an emission control driven.
system malfunction. (Continued)
. The engine coolant temperature
is too high.

Power Door Locks When locking the doors with the Safety Locks
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock Rear door security locks prevent
five seconds after the last door is passengers from opening the rear
closed. You will hear three chimes doors from the inside.
to signal that the delayed locking Press (C) to activate the safety
feature is in use. locks. Once activated, the LED light,
Pressing the power lock switch changes to amber.
twice or Q on the RKE transmitter Pressing the button again
twice will override the delayed deactivates the safety locks.
locking feature and immediately lock See Power Door Locks on
all the doors. page 1‑7.
This feature will not operate if the
A. Door Unlock key is in the ignition.
B. Door Lock This feature can be programmed.
See “Delayed Door Lock” under
C. Safety Lock Vehicle Personalization on
The power door lock switches are page 4‑34.
located on the instrument panel.
. Press (A) to unlock the doors.
. Remove the key from the
ignition and press (B) to lock
the doors.

Doors Do not press the touchpad while

WARNING (Continued) closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
Liftgate (Manual) . Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that Always close the liftgate before
driving.
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate Liftgate (Power)
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index.
Power Liftgate Operation
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with For more information about
any objects that pass through the carbon monoxide, see Engine
seal between the body and the Exhaust on page 8‑34.
{ WARNING
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine Exhaust gases can enter the
exhaust contains Carbon Notice: If you open the liftgate vehicle if it is driven with the
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be without checking for overhead
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
seen or smelled. It can cause obstructions such as a garage
any objects that pass through the
unconsciousness and even death. door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass. seal between the body and the
If the vehicle must be driven with Always check to make sure the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: area above and behind the liftgate exhaust contains Carbon
is clear before opening it. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
. Close all of the windows.
seen or smelled. It can cause
. Fully open the air outlets on Press the touchpad located in the unconsciousness and even death.
or under the instrument handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open. (Continued)
panel.
(Continued)

be in P (Park) to use the power

WARNING (Continued) feature. The taillamps flash when
the power liftgate moves.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: { WARNING
. Close all of the windows.
You or others could be injured if
. Fully open the air outlets on caught in the path of the power
or under the instrument liftgate. Make sure there is no one
panel. in the way of the liftgate as it is
. Adjust the Climate Control opening and closing.
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and Notice: If you open the liftgate Choose the power liftgate mode by
set the fan speed to the without checking for overhead turning the dial on the switch until
highest setting. See Climate obstructions such as a garage the indicator lines up with the
Control System in the Index. door, you could damage the desired position. The vehicle must
liftgate or the liftgate glass. be in P (Park).
. If the vehicle is equipped with
Always check to make sure the
a power liftgate, disable the The three modes are:
area above and behind the liftgate
power liftgate function.
is clear before opening it. MAX : The liftgate power opens to
For more information about the full open height.
The power liftgate has three modes
carbon monoxide, see Engine 3/4 : The liftgate power opens to a
of operation. Mode selection is
Exhaust on page 8‑34. controlled by the interior mode reduced open height that can be set
switch. by the vehicle operator. Use this
On vehicles with a power liftgate, setting to prevent the liftgate from
the switch is located on the opening into overhead obstructions
overhead console. The vehicle must such as a garage door or roof

mounted cargo during power

. Pressing the touchpad switch on for the system to hold it open.
operation. The liftgate can still be the liftgate outside handle to If movement is stopped below that
fully opened manually. open the liftgate. minimum the liftgate closes.
OFF: The liftgate only operates Do not force the liftgate open or
manually in this position. closed during a power cycle.
Manual operation of a liftgate that The power liftgate may be
also has power operation requires temporarily disabled under extreme
more effort than with a standard temperatures or low battery
manual liftgate. conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode, can still be operated manually.
the liftgate can be power opened If you shift the transmission out of
and closed by: P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate power
. First pressing K and then function will continue to completion.
pressing and holding V on the If you shift the transmission out of
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press and release & on the P (Park) and accelerate before the
transmitter until the liftgate starts liftgate adjacent to the latch to close power liftgate latch is closed, the
moving. See Remote Keyless the liftgate. liftgate may reverse to the open
Entry (RKE) System Operation position. Cargo could fall out of the
Pressing any button, or the vehicle. Always make sure the
on page 1‑3.
touchpad switch while the liftgate is power liftgate is closed and latched
. Pressing the power liftgate moving stops it. Pressing the button
before you drive away.
button on the center of the mode or RKE switch again reverses the
switch, located on the overhead direction. The touch pad switch will
console. stop the liftgate from moving. There
is a minimum distance that the
power liftgate must already be open

If you power open the liftgate and Your vehicle has pinch sensors When power opened with the
the liftgate support struts have lost located on the side edges of the 3/4 mode selected, the liftgate
pressure, the turn signals flash and liftgate. If an object is caught stops at the new set position.
a chime sounds. The liftgate stays between the liftgate and the body There is a minimum that the power
open temporarily, then slowly and presses against this sensor, the liftgate must already be open for the
closes. See your dealer for service liftgate will reverse direction and system to hold it open. The liftgate
before using the liftgate. open fully. The liftgate will remain cannot be set to stop below that
open until it is activated again or minimum.
Obstacle Detection Features closed manually.
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle Manual Operation of Power
Setting the Power Liftgate
during a power open or close cycle, Liftgate
a warning chime will sound and the 3/4 Mode
To change the liftgate to manual
liftgate will automatically reverse To change the liftgate stop position: operation, turn the mode switch to
direction to the full closed or open
1. Turn the liftgate switch to the the OFF position.
position. After removing the
3/4 mode position and power With the power liftgate disabled and
obstruction, the power liftgate
open the liftgate. all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
operation can be used again. If the
liftgate encounters multiple 2. Stop the liftgate movement at can be manually opened and
obstacles on the same power cycle, the desired height by pressing closed. Manual operation of a
the power function will deactivate. any switch. liftgate that also has power
The “Manually Close Power Liftgate” 3. Press and hold the button on the operation requires more effort than
warning message in the Driver liftgate adjacent to the latch until with a standard manual liftgate.
Information Center (DIC) will the turn signals flash and a beep To open the liftgate, press the
display. After removing the sounds to indicate that the new touchpad on the handle on the
obstructions, the liftgate will resume setting is recorded. outside of the liftgate, and lift the
normal power operation. gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. With the power liftgate

disabled the liftgate electric latch will Vehicle Security Disarming the System
still power latch once contact is
Vehicle theft is big business, To disarm the system, do one of the
made with the striker. Always close
especially in some cities. This following:
the liftgate before driving.
vehicle has theft-deterrent features, . Press K on the RKE transmitter.
If the RKE button is pressed while
however, they do not make it
power operation is disabled, the turn . Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
impossible to steal.
signals flash and the liftgate will .
not move. Allow the alarm to time out after
Anti-Theft Alarm System about 30 seconds and reset
The liftgate has an electric latch. itself.
If the battery is disconnected or has This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
low voltage, the liftgate will not system. The alarm automatically disarms.
open. The liftgate will resume Arming the System If the system is armed and any door
operation when the battery is is unlocked without pressing K on
reconnected and charged. To arm the system, either:
the RKE transmitter the alarm
. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. sounds.
. Or, lock the vehicle using the How to Detect a Tamper
key in the driver door. Condition
The alarm automatically arms after If K is pressed and the horn
about 30 seconds. The security
sounds, an attempted break-in has
light, located on the instrument
occurred while the system was
panel, flashes.
armed.
Press V on the RKE transmitter to
open the liftgate without setting off
the alarm. The system rearms when
the liftgate is closed.

If the alarm has been activated, the The system is automatically If the engine does not start and the
“Theft Attempted” message will disarmed when the vehicle is security light stays on there is a
appear on the DIC. See Key and started with the correct key. The key problem with the system. Turn the
Lock Messages on page 4‑31 for uses a transponder that matches ignition off and try again.
additional information. an immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start, and
vehicle and automatically disarms the key appears to be undamaged
Immobilizer the system. Only the correct key or the light continues to stay on, try
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may another ignition key. If the engine
See Radio Frequency Statement on not start if the key is damaged.
page 12‑16 for information does not start with the other key, the
regarding Part 15 of the Federal vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
Communications Commission (FCC) does start, the first key may be
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry damaged. See your dealer who can
Canada. service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
Immobilizer Operation Do not leave the key or device that
This vehicle has a passive The security light, located in the disarms or deactivates the theft
theft-deterrent system. instrument panel cluster, comes on deterrent system in the vehicle.
if there is a problem with arming or
The system does not have to be disarming the theft-deterrent
manually armed or disarmed. system.
The vehicle is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the
immobilized when the key is security light comes on briefly when
removed from the ignition. the ignition is turned on.

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to
Convex Mirrors L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
{ WARNING 2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
A convex mirror can make things, desired direction.
like other vehicles, look farther 3. Adjust each outside mirror so
away than they really are. If you that the side of the vehicle and
cut too sharply into the right lane, the area behind are seen.
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or 4. Return the selector switch to the
glance over your shoulder before middle position.
changing lanes.
Controls for the outside power Heated Mirrors
mirrors are located on the
The passenger side mirror is convex For vehicles with heated mirrors:
driver door.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from < (Rear Window Defogger):
the driver seat. Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 7‑3 for more information.

Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror
package, the outside mirrors have Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic
a park tilt feature. This feature Hold the inside rearview mirror in dimming inside rearview mirror.
autiomatically tilts the outside the center to move it for a clearer
mirrors to a preselected position Vehicles with OnStar® have three
view of behind your vehicle. Adjust additional control buttons located at
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). the mirror to avoid glare from the
This allows the driver to view the the bottom of the mirror. See your
headlamps behind you. Push the dealer for more information on the
curb for parallel parking. tab forward for daytime use and pull system and how to subscribe to
The passenger and driver mirrors it for nighttime use. OnStar. See the OnStar owner's
return to their original position Vehicles with OnStar® have three guide for more information about the
when the vehicle is shifted out of additional control buttons located at services OnStar provides.
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned the bottom of the mirror. See your
off or to OFF/LOCK. O : Press to turn automatic
dealer for more information on the dimming on or off.
This feature can be turned on or system and how to subscribe to
off through the Driver Information OnStar. See the OnStar owner's If the vehicle has a rear vision
Center (DIC). See Vehicle guide for more information about the camera (RVC) the O button for
Personalization on page 4‑34 for services OnStar provides. turning the automatic dimming
more information. feature on or off will not be
available. See Rear Vision Camera
(RVC) on page 8‑49 for more
information.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows

Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
{ WARNING
vehicle behind you. The dimming Leaving children, helpless adults,
feature comes on and the indicator or pets in a vehicle with the
light comes on each time the vehicle windows closed is dangerous.
is started. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
Cleaning the Mirror
permanent injuries or even death
Do not spray glass cleaner directly from heat stroke. Never leave a
on the mirror. Use a soft towel child, a helpless adult, or a pet
dampened with water. alone in a vehicle, especially with Power Windows
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather. { WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
(Continued)

The driver door also has switches Programming the Power

WARNING (Continued) that control the passenger and rear Windows
windows. The power windows work
if caught in the path of a closing when the ignition is in ACC/ Programming the power windows
window. Do not leave keys in a ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when may be necessary if the vehicle's
vehicle with children. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is battery has been disconnected or
active. See Retained Accessory discharged.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout Power (RAP) on page 8‑29. To program the window:
button to prevent unintentional Press or pull on the switch to lower 1. Close all doors with the ignition
operation of the windows. or raise the window. in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
RUN position, or when Retained
Express Down Windows Accessory Power (RAP) is
Windows that have the active. See Retained Accessory
express‐down feature allow the Power (RAP) on page 8‑29.
windows to be lowered without 2. Press and continue to hold the
holding the switch. Press the window switch until the window
window switch fully and release it to is fully open.
activate the express‐down feature.
The express mode can be canceled 3. Pull up and hold the window
at any time by briefly pressing, switch to close the window.
or pulling the switch. Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
Uplevel shown, base similar

The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.

Window Lockout Roof

o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is located on the Sunroof
driver door. This feature prevents
the rear passenger windows from On vehicles with a sunroof, the
operating, except from the driver switches used to operate it are
position. Press the switch to turn located on the headliner above the
the lockout feature on or off. An rearview mirror. The ignition must be
indicator light shows the feature in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
is on. or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) to operate the sunroof. See
Ignition Positions on page 8‑28 and
Sun Visors Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . Press and hold the front or
Pull the sun visor down to block on page 8‑29. rear of the driver side switch to
glare. Detach the sun visor from the open or close the sunroof. The
center mount and slide it along the sunshade automatically opens
rod from side-to-side to cover the with the sunroof, but must be
driver or passenger side of the front closed manually.
window. Swing the sun visor to the . Press and hold the front of the
side to cover the side window. It can passenger side switch to vent
be moved along the rod from the sunroof. Press and hold the
side-to-side in this position also. rear of the switch to close.

Express-open/Express-close Anti-Pinch Feature Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the tracks that
Press and release the front or rear If an object is in the path of the
could cause an issue with sunroof
of the driver side switch to sunroof when it is closing, the
operation, noise or plug the water
express-open or express-close the anti-pinch feature detects the object
drainage system. Periodically open
sunroof. and stops the sunroof from closing
the sunroof and remove any
at the point of the obstruction. The
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof then returns to the full-open
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
position.
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.

2 NOTES

Seats and Restraints 2-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .

Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
2-21
2-21
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-36
Replacing Airbag System
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
2-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Child Restraints

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Head Restraints Airbag System Infants and Young
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-25 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-41
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 When Should an Airbag Where to Put the
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 What Makes an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 for Children (LATCH
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 How Does an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats What Will You See After an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Securing Child Restraints
Passenger Sensing (Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-54
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Adding Equipment to the
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-35
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have head restraints in all outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
The vehicle's rear seat head
restraints are not adjustable.

Front Seats WARNING (Continued)

Power Seat Adjustment
Seat Adjustment pedal when you do not want to.

Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle located at the
front of the seat.
2. Move the seat forward or
backward to adjust the seat
position.
3. Release the handle to stop the Driver Seat with Power Seat
seat from moving. Control, Power Recline,
and Power Lumbar shown
{ WARNING A: Memory Seat Adjustment
You can lose control of the B: Power Seat Adjustment

vehicle if you try to adjust a C: Power Recline Adjustment
manual driver's seat while the D: Power Lumbar Adjustment
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
(Continued)

Adjust the seatback by moving the A second seating and mirror

control (C) forward or rearward. position can be programmed by
See Reclining Seatbacks on repeating the above steps and
page 2‑5 for more information. pressing button 2.
Adjust the lumbar support by using To recall the memory positions, the
the control (D). See Lumbar vehicle must be in P (Park). Press
Adjustment on page 2‑5 for more and hold either button 1 or button 2
information. corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat, outside mirrors
Memory Seats and pedals, if available move to the
stored position. Releasing the
The vehicle may have a memory
button before the stored position is
Driver Seat with Power Seat seat allowing saved and recalled
reached cancels the recall.
seat settings. Controls (A) are
Control, Power Lumbar, Entry using the Remote Keyless
located on the outboard side of
and Manual Recline shown the seat. Entry (RKE) transmitter with
D: Power Lumbar Adjustment the remote recall feature on
To save:
automatically adjusts the seat and
E: Power Seat Adjustment 1. Adjust the driver seat, including mirrors. There is no adjustment
F: Manual Recline Adjustment the seatback recliner, and both when the position has not been
On vehicles with power seats, the outside mirrors, to a comfortable changed by another seating
controls are located on the outboard position. position.
side of the seats. 2. Press and hold the MEM button When the remote recall feature is
Adjust the power seat by moving the and button 1 at the same time on, the seat and mirror position will
control (B) forward or rearward, up until a beep indicates the be stored when the ignition is turned
or down, or by pressing the top or position is stored. to LOCK/OFF. It is stored according
bottom of control (E). to the RKE transmitter used to start
the vehicle.

To stop recall movement of the RKE Lumbar Adjustment WARNING (Continued)

remote recall feature, press one of
the power seat controls, memory Power Lumbar
buttons, or power mirror buttons. movement could startle and
Seats with power lumbar have confuse you, or make you push a
Memory Seat recall may stop if controls located on the outboard pedal when you do not want to.
the seat is blocked. Remove the side of the seat. See Power Seat Adjust the driver's seat only when
obstruction and then press the Adjustment on page 2‑3 for more the vehicle is not moving.
memory button again. If the memory information.
function does not work properly, see Adjust lumbar support by using the
your dealer for service. rocker switch (D) on the outboard
side of the driver seat.
{ WARNING
Easy Exit Seat
Release the switch when the If either seatback is not locked, it
If the easy exit seat feature is on in could move forward in a sudden
the Driver Information Center (DIC), seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support. stop or crash. That could cause
automatic adjustment occurs when
injury to the person sitting there.
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF
Reclining Seatbacks Always push and pull on the
and the driver door is opened. The
driver seat moves back. seatbacks to be sure they are
Manual Reclining Seatbacks locked.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑34 for more information.
{ WARNING Vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks have a lever on the
You can lose control of the outboard side of the seat. Lift the
vehicle if you try to adjust a lever and move the seatback to the
manual driver's seat while the desired position, then release the
vehicle is moving. The sudden lever. The seatback should not
move when pushed or pulled.
(Continued)

Power Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other Do not have a seatback reclined if
injuries. your vehicle is moving.
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks, the switch is located on The lap belt cannot do its job
the outboard side of the seat. See either. In a crash, the belt could
Power Seat Adjustment on go up over your abdomen. The
page 2‑3 for more information. belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
Move the switch forward or rearward cause serious internal injuries.
to adjust the seatback.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.

Heated Front Seats Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the
{ WARNING heated seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
If you cannot feel temperature vehicle start. The heated seats will
change or pain to the skin, the be canceled when the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns turned on. Press the button to use
even at low temperatures. To the heated seats after the vehicle is
reduce the risk of burns, people started.
with such a condition should use The heated seat indicator lights on
care when using the seat heater, the button do not turn on during a
especially for long periods of remote start.
time. Do not place anything on Press the button L to heat the seat
cushion and seatback. The heated seat temperature
the seat that insulates against
performance of an unoccupied seat
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, Press the button once for the may be reduced. This is normal.
cover or similar item. This may highest setting. With each press, the
cause the seat heater to heated seat will change to the next The heated seats will not turn on
overheat. An overheated seat lower setting, and then the off during a remote start unless the
heater may cause a burn or may setting. The lights indicate three for heated seat feature is enabled in
damage the seat. the highest setting and one for the the vehicle personalization menu.
lowest. See Remote Vehicle Start on
On vehicles with heated front seats, page 1‑5 and "Remote Start
The passenger seat may take Auto Heat Seats" under Vehicle
the controls are located near the longer to heat up.
climate controls. To operate the Personalization on page 4‑34 for
heated seats the ignition must be in more information.
ON/RUN.

Rear Seats WARNING (Continued)

Split Folding Seatbacks rear seatback, always check to
With this feature, either side of the be sure that the safety belts are
rear seatback can be folded down properly routed and attached, and
for more cargo space. are not twisted.
{ WARNING Notice: Folding a rear seat with

the safety belts still fastened may
If either seatback is not locked, it cause damage to the seat or the
could move forward in a sudden safety belts. Always unbuckle the
stop or crash. That could cause safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position 2. Lift the lever located on the top
injury to the person sitting there.
before folding a rear seat. of the seatback.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are 1. To fold the seatback down: 3. Fold the seatback forward.
locked. Keep the seat in the upright locked
The rear safety belts must
be unbuckled and the front position when not in use.
seatbacks are not reclined. To recline the seatback:
{ WARNING 1. Lift and hold the lever located on
A safety belt that is improperly top of the seatback.
routed, not properly attached, 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then
or twisted will not provide the release the lever when the
protection needed in a crash. The seatback is in the desired
person wearing the belt could be position.
seriously injured. After raising the
(Continued)

To slide the entire seat forward or Safety Belts

rearward: { WARNING
This section of the manual
1. Lift and hold the release bar It is extremely dangerous to ride
describes how to use safety belts
under the front of the seat in a cargo area, inside or outside
properly. It also describes some
cushion to unlock the seat. of a vehicle. In a collision, people
things not to do with safety belts.
2. Slide the seat to the desired riding in these areas are more
position. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
3. Release the bar.
Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is
4. Try to move the seat back and safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and
forth to endure the seat is locked properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in
into place. your vehicle is in a seat and using
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly.
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a
ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts.
and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on
seriously injured or killed. In the page 4‑14 for additional
information.
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work

provinces, the law requires wearing
When you ride in or on anything,
safety belts. Here is why:
you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
Put someone on it.
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.

With safety belts, you slow down

as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... A: You could be — whether you are
stopped by something. In a real wearing a safety belt or not. But
vehicle, it could be the windshield... your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
or the safety belts!

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts
should I have to wear safety never drive far from home,
belts? why should I wear safety
Properly
A: Airbags are supplemental belts? This section is only for people of
systems only; so they work with A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size.
safety belts — not instead of but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
them. Whether or not an airbag one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
is provided, all occupants still and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
have to buckle up to get the hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
most protection. That is true not not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in the
only in frontal collisions, but beyond your control, such as vehicle, see Older Children on
especially in side and other bad drivers. page 2‑37 or Infants and Young
collisions. Most accidents occur within Children on page 2‑39. Follow
40 km (25 miles) of home. And those rules for everyone's
the greatest number of serious protection.
injuries and deaths occur at It is very important for all occupants
speeds of less than 65 km/h to buckle up. Statistics show that
(40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often
Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.

First, before you or your shoulder belt should go over the

passenger(s) wear a safety belt, shoulder and across the chest. { WARNING
there is important information you These parts of the body are best
should know. able to take belt restraining forces. You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
The shoulder belt locks if there is a crash, you would move forward
sudden stop or crash. too much, which could increase
Q: What is wrong with this? injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Sit up straight and always keep your

feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
applies force to the strong pelvic It will not give as much
bones and you would be less likely protection this way.
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The

Q: What is wrong with this?

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
lap belt should be worn low and You can be seriously injured if
snug on the hips, just touching your belt is buckled in the wrong
the thighs. place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
Q: What is wrong with this? The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will

not give nearly as much
protection this way.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
buckle.
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
(Continued)

Q: What is wrong with this?

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
bones, and that could cause You can be seriously injured if
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure you wear the shoulder belt under
the belt goes under the armrests. your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
Q: What is wrong with this? which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The belt is over an armrest. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
{ WARNING chest.
You can be seriously injured if

your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much A: The shoulder belt is worn under
too high. In a crash, you can slide the arm. It should be worn over
under the belt. The belt force the shoulder at all times.
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
(Continued)

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder Belt Adjustment” later in this section

for instructions on use and
All seating positions in the vehicle important safety information.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
get twisted.
Pull up on the latch plate to
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 2‑21. up on the shoulder belt.
belt go back slightly to unlock it. It may be necessary to pull
Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt stitching on the safety belt
more slowly. through the latch plate to fully
could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary. tighten the lap belt on smaller
passenger belt is pulled out all occupants.
the way, the child restraint 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
locking feature may be engaged. height adjuster, move it to the
If this happens, let the belt go height that is right for you. See
back all the way and start again. “Shoulder Belt Height

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height
To unlatch the belt, push the button adjustment could reduce the Move the height adjuster up to the
on the buckle. For outboard seating effectiveness of the safety belt desired position by pushing up on
positions, slide the latch plate up in a crash. the height adjuster.
the safety belt webbing when the After the height adjuster is set to the
safety belt is not in use. The latch desired position, try to move it up or
plate should rest on the stitching on down without pressing the release
the safety belt, near the guide loop. button (A) to make sure it has
Before a door is closed, be sure the locked into position. Press the
safety belt is out of the way. If a release button to lower the height
door is slammed against a safety adjuster.
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Pretensioners have outgrown booster seats and

for some adults. When installed and
This vehicle has safety belt
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
pretensioners for front outboard
positions the belt away from the
occupants. Although the safety belt
neck and head.
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly. There is one guide for each outside
They can help tighten the safety passenger position in the rear seat.
belts during the early stages of a Here is how to install a comfort
moderate to severe frontal and near guide to the safety belt:
frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
Pretensioners work only once. If the and insert the two edges of the
pretensioners activate in a crash, belt into the slots of the guide.
they need to be replaced, and other
new parts for the vehicle's safety
belt system may be required. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 2‑22.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder 1. Remove the guide from its
belt comfort guides. If not, they are storage pocket on the side
available through your dealer. The of the seatback.
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who

To remove and store the comfort

WARNING (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Slide
of the body are best able to take the guide back into its storage
belt restraining forces. pocket located on the side of the
seatback.
3. The belt should not be twisted

and it should lie flat. The elastic
cord must be under the belt and
the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly 4. Buckle, position, and release the
worn may not provide the safety belt as described
protection needed in a crash. The previously in this section. Make
person wearing the belt could be sure that the shoulder belt
seriously injured. The shoulder crosses the shoulder.
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in
around you, you should use it. a crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 4‑14 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on
A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
page 2‑22.
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
throughout the pregnancy. belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.

Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued) Airbag System

Keep belts clean and dry. The vehicle has the following
safety belt systems are working airbags:
{ WARNING properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as . A frontal airbag for the right front
It may severely weaken them. In possible. passenger.
a crash, they might not be able to . A seat-mounted side impact
provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of
airbag for the driver.
Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary.
soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that . A seat-mounted side impact
were used during any crash may airbag for the right front
have been stressed or damaged. passenger.
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
System Parts After a belt assemblies inspected or and the passenger seated
Crash replaced. directly behind the driver.
New parts and repairs may be . A roof-rail airbag for the right
{ WARNING necessary even if the safety belt front passenger and the
system was not being used at the passenger seated directly
A crash can damage the safety time of the crash. behind the right front passenger.
belt system in the vehicle.
Have the safety belt pretensioners All of the airbags in the vehicle will
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a
may not properly protect the have the word AIRBAG embossed
crash, or if the airbag readiness light in the trim or on an attached label
person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle
serious injury or even death in a near the deployment opening.
or while you are driving. See Airbag
crash. To help make sure the Readiness Light on page 4‑15.
(Continued)

For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear on the middle WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel death. Secure objects away from designed to work with safety
for the right front passenger. the area in which an airbag would belts, but do not replace them.
inflate. For more information, see Also, airbags are not designed to
With seat-mounted side impact Where Are the Airbags? on deploy in every crash. In some
airbags, the word AIRBAG will page 2‑25 and Vehicle Load crashes safety belts are your only
appear on the side of the seatback Limits on page 8‑24. restraint. See When Should an
closest to the door.
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑26.
With roof-rail airbags, the word Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety Wearing your safety belt during a
AIRBAG will appear along the trim.
belts. Even though today's airbags crash helps reduce your chance
Even if you do not have a right front of hitting things inside the vehicle
are also designed to help reduce
passenger seat in the vehicle there or being ejected from it. Airbags
the risk of injury from the force of an
is still an active frontal airbag in the are “supplemental restraints” to
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
right side of the instrument panel. the safety belts. Everyone in your
very quickly to do their job.
Do not place cargo in front of this vehicle should wear a safety belt
airbag. Here are the most important things
properly — whether or not there is
to know about the airbag system:
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Be sure that cargo is not near an
airbag. In a crash, an inflating You can be severely injured or
airbag might force that object killed in a crash if you are not
toward a person. This could wearing your safety belt — even if
cause severe injury or even you have airbags. Airbags are
(Continued) (Continued)

{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously
close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol.
close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
The system checks the airbag
be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt
electrical system for malfunctions.
of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is
The light tells you if there is an
Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag
position before and during a children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 4‑15 for
crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint more information.
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in your
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 2‑37 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 2‑39.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.

Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown, Passenger

airbag is in the instrument panel on Side similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.

WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags are designed to
inflating airbag must be kept inflate in moderate to severe frontal
clear. Do not put anything or near-frontal crashes to help
between an occupant and an reduce the potential for severe
airbag, and do not attach or put injuries mainly to the driver's or
anything on the steering wheel right front passenger's head and
hub or on or near any other chest. However, they are only
airbag covering. designed to inflate if the impact
Do not use seat accessories that exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side shown, Passenger block the inflation path of a deployment threshold. Deployment
Side similar thresholds are used to predict how
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
severe a crash is likely to be in time
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, Never secure anything to the roof for the airbags to inflate and help
right front passenger, and second of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags restrain the occupants.
row outboard passengers are in the by routing a rope or tie down
ceiling above the side windows. Whether the frontal airbags will
through any door or window or should deploy is not based on
opening. If you do, the path of an how fast your vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be It depends largely on what you hit,
blocked. the direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
quickly your vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)

Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Seat-mounted side impact airbags
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. are not intended to inflate in frontal
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the impacts, near-frontal impacts,
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
. If the vehicle hits an object that The vehicle has electronic frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a impact airbag is intended to deploy
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more on the side of the vehicle that is
that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags deploy when either side of the
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
(like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal system predicts that the vehicle is
inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. about to roll over, or in a severe
than if the vehicle hits a wide frontal impact.
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See In any particular crash, no one
. If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 2‑22. can say whether an airbag should
at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and have inflated simply because of
inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to the damage to a vehicle or because
than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side of what the repair costs were.
into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail For frontal airbags, inflation is
Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate determined by what the vehicle hits,
specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe the angle of the impact, and how
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side quickly the vehicle slows down. For
impact and roof-rail airbags will seat-mounted side impact and
inflate if the crash severity is above roof-rail airbags, deployment is

determined by the location and How Does an Airbag full or partial ejection in rollover
severity of the side impact. In a events, although no system can
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
Restrain? prevent all such ejections.
deployment is determined by the In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in
direction of the roll. near frontal collisions, even belted many types of collisions, primarily
occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion is
What Makes an Airbag wheel or the instrument panel. In not toward those airbags. See When
Inflate? moderate to severe side collisions, Should an Airbag Inflate? on
even belted occupants can contact page 2‑26 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing the inside of the vehicle.
system sends an electrical signal Airbags should never be regarded
Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement
triggering a release of gas from the
provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbags distribute the force of the
airbag causing the bag to break out
impact more evenly over the
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
occupant's upper body, stopping
What Will You See After
the airbag, and related hardware are an Airbag Inflates?
the occupant more gradually.
all part of the airbag module.
Seat‐mounted side impact and After the frontal airbags and
Frontal airbag modules are located roof-rail airbags distribute the force seat-mounted side impact airbags
inside the steering wheel and of the impact more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
instrument panel. For vehicles with occupant's upper body. quickly that some people may not
seat-mounted side impact airbags, even realize an airbag inflated.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
there are airbag modules in the side Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
of the front seatbacks closest to the partially inflated for some time after
head and chest of occupants in the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail they deploy. Some components of
outboard seating positions in the
airbags, there are airbag modules in the airbag module may be hot for
first and second rows. The rollover
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the several minutes. For location of the
capable roof-rail airbags are
side windows that have occupant airbag modules, see What Makes
designed to help reduce the risk of
seating positions. an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑28.

The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming problems following an airbag concealed damage that could
from the vents in the deflated deployment, you should seek make it difficult to safely operate
airbags. Airbag inflation does not medical attention. the vehicle.
prevent the driver from seeing out of Use caution if you should attempt
the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn to restart the engine after a crash
the vehicle, nor does it prevent has occurred.
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate. In many crashes severe enough to
{ WARNING You can lock the doors, turn off the inflate the airbag, windshields are
interior lamps and hazard warning broken by vehicle deformation.
When an airbag inflates, there Additional windshield breakage may
flashers by using the controls for
may be dust in the air. This dust also occur from the right front
those features.
could cause breathing problems passenger airbag.
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. { WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
To avoid this, everyone in the A crash severe enough to inflate inflates, you will need some new
vehicle should get out as soon as the airbags may have also parts for the airbag system.
it is safe to do so. If you have damaged important functions in If you do not get them, the
breathing problems but cannot the vehicle, such as the fuel airbag system will not be there
get out of the vehicle after an system, brake and steering to help protect you in another
airbag inflates, then get fresh air systems, etc. Even if the vehicle crash. A new system will include
by opening a window or a door. appears to be drivable after a airbag modules and possibly
If you experience breathing moderate crash, there may be other parts. The service manual
(Continued) for your vehicle covers the need
(Continued) to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensing The passenger sensing system
and diagnostic module which turns off the right front passenger
records information after a frontal airbag under certain
crash. See Vehicle Data conditions. The driver airbag,
Recording and Privacy on seat‐mounted side impact airbags
page 12‑14 and Event Data and the roof-rail airbags are not
Recorders on page 12‑15. affected by the passenger sensing
United States
. Let only qualified technicians system.
work on the airbag systems. The passenger sensing system
Improper service can mean that works with sensors that are part of
an airbag system will not work the right front passenger seat. The
properly. See your dealer for sensors are designed to detect the
service. presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
Passenger Sensing Canada front passenger frontal airbag
System The words ON and OFF, or the should be enabled (may inflate)
symbol for on and off, are visible or not.
The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are
sensing system for the right front According to accident statistics,
using remote start, if equipped, to children are safer when properly
passenger position. The passenger start the vehicle from a distance,
airbag status indicator will be visible secured in a rear seat in the correct
you may not see the system check. child restraint for their weight
on the overhead console when the When the system check is
vehicle is started. and size.
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will We recommend that children be
be visible. See Passenger Airbag secured in a rear seat, including: an
Status Indicator on page 4‑15. infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a booster The passenger sensing system is

seat; and children, who are large WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
enough, using safety belts. passenger frontal airbag if:
Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right
. The right front passenger seat is
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no unoccupied.
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can . The system determines that an
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not infant is present in a child
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual restraint.
circumstance, even though the
{ WARNING airbag is turned off.
. A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints a period of time.
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag . Or, if there is a critical problem
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a with the airbag system or the
passenger airbag inflates. This forward-facing child restraint in passenger sensing system.
is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
When the passenger sensing
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
system has turned off the right front
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to passenger frontal airbag, the off
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a indicator will light and stay lit to
child restraint can be seriously rear seat. remind you that the airbag is off.
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Airbag Status
passenger airbag inflates and the Indicator on page 4‑15.
passenger seat is in a forward
The passenger sensing system is
position. designed to turn on (may inflate) the
(Continued) right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a

person of adult size is sitting 4. Reinstall the child restraint

properly in the right front { WARNING following the directions
passenger seat. provided by the child restraint
If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
When the passenger sensing comes on and stays on, it means
system has allowed the airbag to be Securing Child Restraints (Rear
that something may be wrong Seat ) on page 2‑51 or
enabled, the on indicator will light with the airbag system. To help
and stay lit to remind you that the Securing Child Restraints (Front
avoid injury to yourself or others, Passenger Seat) on page 2‑54.
airbag is active. have the vehicle serviced right
For some children, including 5. If, after reinstalling the child
away. See Airbag Readiness
children in child restraints, and for restraint and restarting the
Light on page 4‑15 for more
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
information, including important turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
sensing system may or may not safety information.
turn off the right front passenger recline the vehicle seatback and
frontal airbag, depending upon the adjust the seat cushion, if
If the On Indicator is Lit for a adjustable, to make sure that the
person’s seating posture and Child Restraint
body build. Everyone in the vehicle vehicle seatback is not pushing
who has outgrown child restraints If a child restraint has been installed the child restraint into the seat
should wear a safety belt and the on indicator is lit: cushion.
properly — whether or not there is 1. Turn the vehicle off. Also make sure the child
an airbag for that person. restraint is not trapped under the
2. Remove the child restraint from vehicle head restraint. If this
the vehicle. happens, adjust the head
3. Remove any additional items restraint. See Head Restraints
from the seat such as blankets, on page 2‑2.
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.

6. Restart the vehicle. properly in the seat. If this happens, Additional Factors Affecting
The passenger sensing system use the following steps to allow the System Operation
may or may not turn off the system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger Safety belts help keep the
airbag for a child in a child passenger in position on the seat
restraint depending upon the frontal airbag:
during vehicle maneuvers and
child’s seating posture and body 1. Turn the vehicle off. braking, which helps the passenger
build. It is better to secure the 2. Remove any additional material sensing system maintain the
child restraint in a rear seat. from the seat, such as blankets, passenger airbag status. See
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an cushions, seat covers, seat “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
heaters, or seat massagers. in the Index for additional
Adult-Size Occupant information about the importance of
3. Place the seatback in the fully proper restraint use.
upright position.
A thick layer of additional material,
4. Have the person sit upright in such as a blanket or cushion,
the seat, centered on the seat or aftermarket equipment such as
cushion, with legs comfortably seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
extended. massagers can affect how well the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger sensing system
person remain in this position for operates. We recommend that you
two to three minutes after the on not use seat covers or other
indicator is lit. aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
page 2‑35 for more information
the right front passenger seat, but
about modifications that can affect
the off indicator is lit, it could be
how the system operates.
because that person is not sitting

A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an To purchase a service manual, see
performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 12‑12.
. The passenger sensing system other electronic device, is put on
may turn off the passenger an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
{ WARNING
airbag when liquid is soaked
into the seat. If this happens, the the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the
off indicator will be lit, and the ignition is turned off and the
airbag readiness light on the { WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag
instrument panel will also be lit. can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you
. Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it
has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the
sensing system will enable (turn They are probably part of the
proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow
on) the passenger airbag while a
sensing system. proper service procedures, and
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger make sure the person performing
airbag is turned on, the on Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
indicator will be lit. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry Airbags affect how the vehicle
the seat immediately. If the airbag should be serviced. There are parts
readiness light is lit, do not install a of the airbag system in several
child restraint or allow anyone to places around the vehicle. Your
occupy the seat. See Airbag dealer and the service manual have
Readiness Light on page 4‑15 for information about servicing the
important safety information. vehicle and the airbag system.

Adding Equipment to the that are part of the passenger Satisfaction Procedure in this
seat. The passenger sensing manual. See Customer
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly Satisfaction Procedure on
Q: Is there anything I might add if the original seat trim is page 12‑1.
to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers, If the vehicle has rollover
that could keep the airbags upholstery or trim, or with GM roof-rail airbags, see Different
from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim Size Tires and Wheels on
designed for a different vehicle. page 9‑55 for additional
A: Yes. If you add things that
Any object, such as an important information.
change the vehicle's frame,
aftermarket seat heater or a
bumper system, height, front end Q: Because I have a disability,
comfort enhancing pad or
or side sheet metal, they may I have to get my vehicle
device, installed under or on top
keep the airbag system from modified. How can I find out
of the seat fabric, could also
working properly. Changing or whether this will affect my
interfere with the operation of
moving any parts of the front airbag system?
the passenger sensing system.
seats, safety belts, the airbag
This could either prevent proper A: If you have questions, call
sensing and diagnostic module,
deployment of the passenger Customer Assistance. The
steering wheel, instrument
airbag(s) or prevent the phone numbers and addresses
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
passenger sensing system for Customer Assistance are in
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
from properly turning off the Step Two of the Customer
trim, overhead console, front
passenger airbag(s). See Satisfaction Procedure in this
sensors, side impact sensors,
Passenger Sensing System on manual. See Customer
rollover sensor module, or airbag
page 2‑30. Satisfaction Procedure on
wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system. If you have questions, call page 12‑1.
Customer Assistance. The
In addition, the vehicle has a
phone numbers and addresses
passenger sensing system
for Customer Assistance are in
for the right front passenger
Step Two of the Customer
position, which includes sensors

In addition, your dealer and the Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
service manual have information replace airbag system parts. See
about the location of the airbag
Parts After a Crash your dealer for service.
sensors, sensing and diagnostic If the airbag readiness light stays on
module and airbag wiring. { WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
Airbag System Check system may not work properly. Have
systems in your vehicle.
The airbag system does not need A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
regularly scheduled maintenance or Airbag Readiness Light on
may not work properly and
replacement. Make sure the airbag page 4‑15 for more information.
may not protect you and your
readiness light is working. See passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on in serious injury or even death.
page 4‑15 for more information. To help make sure your airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering is systems are working properly
damaged, opened, or broken, the after a crash, have them
airbag may not work properly. Do inspected and any necessary
not open or break the airbag replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2‑28. See your
dealer for service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state maintained for the length of the
the weight and height limitations for trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat return to the booster seat.
with a lap-shoulder belt until the Q: What is the proper way to
child passes the below fit test: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
Older children who have outgrown under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
booster seats should wear the page 2‑17 for more information. abdomen, which could cause
vehicle's safety belts. If the shoulder belt still does not severe or even fatal internal
rest on the shoulder, then return injuries in a crash.
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 2‑17.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint might also slide under the lap
system secured in a rear seating belt. The belt force would then be
position. applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
In a crash, children who are not injuries. The shoulder belt should
buckled up can strike other people go over the shoulder and across
who are buckled up, or can be
the chest.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow two children to wear safety belt with the shoulder belt
the same safety belt. The safety behind their back. A child can be
belt can not properly spread the seriously injured by not wearing
impact forces. In a crash, the two the lap-shoulder belt properly. In
children can be crushed together a crash, the child would not be
and seriously injured. A safety restrained by the shoulder belt.
belt must be used by only one The child could move too far
person at a time. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag arms. An infant should be
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride restraint.
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)

Q: What are the different types of

{ WARNING add-on child restraints?
Never do this. A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
Children who are up against, owner, are available in four basic
or very close to, any airbag when types. Selection of a particular
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint should take into
or killed. Never put a rear-facing consideration not only the child's
child restraint in the right front weight, height, and age but also
seat. Secure a rear-facing child whether or not the restraint will
restraint in a rear seat. It is also be compatible with the motor
better to secure a forward-facing vehicle in which it will be used.
child restraint in a rear seat. If you For most basic types of child
must secure a forward-facing restraints, there are many
child restraint in the right front different models available. When
seat, always move the front purchasing a child restraint, be
passenger seat as far back as it sure it is designed to be used in
will go. a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems

instructions that come with the { WARNING
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
available for children with the hip bones, as it should.
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
{ WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of
because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
fully developed and its head crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
the rest of its body. In a crash, an child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant in a rear-facing child infant.
restraint settles into the restraint, The harness system holds the infant
so the crash forces can be in place and, in a crash, acts to
distributed across the strongest keep the infant positioned in the
part of an infant's body, the back restraint.
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.

Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑45 for
more information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the child Securing the Child Within the Where to Put the
restraint is not properly secured in Child Restraint
the vehicle.
Restraint
When securing an add-on child { WARNING According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which A child can be seriously injured or properly restrained in a child
may be on the restraint itself or in a killed in a crash if the child is not restraint system or infant restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. properly secured in the child system secured in a rear seating
The child restraint instructions are restraint. Secure the child position.
important, so if they are not properly following the instructions We recommend that children and
available, obtain a replacement that came with that child restraint. child restraints be secured in a rear
copy from the manufacturer. seat, including: an infant or a child
Keep in mind that an unsecured riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
child restraint can move around in a a child riding in a forward-facing
collision or sudden stop and injure child seat; an older child riding in a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to booster seat; and children, who are
properly secure any child restraint in large enough, using safety belts.
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.

A label on your sun visor says, recommend that rear-facing child

“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) restraints not be transported in the
the front.” This is because the risk to vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is Wherever you install a child
if the airbag deploys. restraint, be sure to secure the child
turned off.
restraint properly.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
Keep in mind that an unsecured
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a child restraint can move around in a
restraint can be seriously injured collision or sudden stop and injure
forward-facing child restraint in
or killed if the right front people in the vehicle. Be sure to
the right front seat, always move
passenger airbag inflates. This is properly secure any child restraint in
the front passenger seat as far your vehicle — even when no child
because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to is in it.
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating rear seat. If you need to secure more than one
airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint in the rear seat,
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System review the following illustrations.
injured or killed if the right front on page 2‑30 for additional Depending on where you place the
passenger airbag inflates and the information. child restraint or the size of the child
passenger seat is in a forward restraint, you may not be able to
When securing a child restraint in a access certain safety belt
position. rear seating position, study the assemblies or LATCH anchors for
Even if the passenger sensing instructions that came with your additional passengers or child
system has turned off the right child restraint to make sure it is restraints.
front passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle.
system is fail-safe. No one can If the vehicle does not have a rear
guarantee that an airbag will not seat that will accommodate a
(Continued) rear-facing child restraint, we

Configurations for Use of Child The LATCH system uses anchors in

Restraints the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
A. Child restraint or occupant using the anchors, or use the
using safety belt vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
A. Child restraint using LATCH that came with that restraint, and
B. Occupant prohibited also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
A. Child restraint or occupant child restraint. A child restraint must
using safety belt never be installed using only the top
B. Child restraint using LATCH tether and anchor.
A. Child restraint using LATCH In order to use the LATCH system
B. Occupant prohibited
Lower Anchors and in your vehicle, you need a child
Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH
C. Child restraint or occupant attachments. The child restraint
using safety belt (LATCH System) manufacturer will provide you with
The LATCH system holds a child instructions on how to use the child
restraint during driving or in a crash. restraint and its attachments. The
This system is designed to make following explains how to attach a
installation of a child restraint easier. child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a
child restraints have lower anchors single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
and attachments or top tether Either will have a single
anchors and attachments. attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchors
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars attached. Be sure to read and follow
built into the vehicle. There are two A top tether (A, C) anchors the the instructions for your child
lower anchors for each LATCH top of the child restraint to the restraint.
seating position that will vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
accommodate a child restraint with into the vehicle. The top tether
lower attachments (B). attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Do not secure a child restraint in a

Anchor Locations position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
Top Tether Anchors position. See Where to Put the
The top tether anchors for each rear Restraint on page 2‑43 for
seating position are located on the additional information.
Rear Seat
back of the rear seatback. You may
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating need to adjust the rear compartment
positions with top tether anchors. storage panel/cover in the rear
j (Lower Anchor): Seating cargo area to access the anchors.
positions with two lower anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on
The rear outboard seating positions the same side of the vehicle as the
have exposed metal anchors seating position where the child
located in the crease between the restraint will be placed.
seatback and the seat cushion.

Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
System Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint to a single anchor. if your vehicle has one, after the
{ WARNING Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment Notice: Do not let the LATCH
not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break attachments rub against the
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may
the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary,
child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to
killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint properly using the attachments.
child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle's Do not fold the empty rear seat
safety belts to secure the with a safety belt buckled. This
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
{ WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
and the instructions in this Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position,
manual. or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
wrapped around their neck and Make sure to attach the child
the safety belt continues to restraint at the proper anchor
tighten. Buckle any unused safety location.
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)

This system is designed to make 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower 2.2. Route, attach and tighten
installation of child restraints easier. attachments on the child the top tether according to
When using lower anchors, do not restraint to the lower your child restraint
use the vehicle's safety belts. anchors. instructions and the
Instead use the vehicle's anchors 2. If the child restraint manufacturer following instructions:
and child restraint attachments to recommends that the top tether
secure the restraints. Some be attached, attach and tighten
restraints also use another vehicle the top tether to the top tether
anchor to secure a top tether. anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
1. Attach and tighten the lower child restraint instructions and
attachments to the lower the following steps:
anchors. If the child restraint 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using
instructions and the instructions does not have a headrest
in this manual. or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
route the tether over the
the desired seating
seatback.
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.

If the position you are using If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a headrest has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or
or head restraint and you head restraint and you are head restraint and you are
are using a dual tether, using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route
route the tether over the the tether around the the tether over the headrest
seatback. headrest or head restraint. or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.

Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat ) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in attached.
{ WARNING a rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is
system in the vehicle. A damaged using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
resulting in serious injury or even
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 2‑45 for how and and as the instructions say.
sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
see your dealer to have the needs to be installed in the rear
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put
system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
necessary replacements made as the Restraint on page 2‑43.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
page 2‑45 for top tether anchor the seat.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
and it was being used during a
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
crash, new LATCH system parts
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
may be needed.
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the you how.
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.

3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap portion of the belt
could be quickly unbuckled if and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a top Armrest Retaining Strap center armrest before installing a
tether, follow the child restraint rear‐facing child restraint in the
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
{ WARNING second row center seat position.
tether. See Lower Anchors and A rear center armrest that is not
Tethers for Children (LATCH properly stowed and secured
System) on page 2‑45 for more could fall forward during a sudden
information. stop or collision. The armrest
7. Push and pull the child restraint could contact an infant secured in
in different directions to be sure a rear‐facing child restraint in the
it is secure. center seat position. Fasten the
To remove the child restraint, retaining strap onto the stowed
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and armrest before installing a
let it return to the stowed position. rear‐facing child restraint in
If the top tether is attached to a top the rear center seat position.
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Stow the rear seat center armrest.
Attach the retaining strap to the
armrest loop (A) and to the center
top tether anchor on the
seatback (B). Make sure the
retaining strap's clips are firmly
attached.
When new, the vehicle's glove box Install the rear-facing child restraint
materials included an armrest using the child restraint
retaining strap. Use it to secure the manufacturer's instructions and the
instructions described previously.

Remove the armrest retaining strap A label on the sun visor says,
before installing a forward facing “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued)
child restraint in the center seat the front.” This is because the risk to
position, as it may interfere with the the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
attachment of the top tether to the if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
top tether anchor on the seatback. turned off.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
Securing Child Restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag
(Front Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a
restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This the front passenger seat as far
forward-facing child restraint. See is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to
Where to Put the Restraint on rear-facing child restraint would
page 2‑43. secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating rear seat.
In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing
passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front on page 2‑30 for additional
passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the information.
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward
Sensing System on page 2‑30 and If the vehicle does not have a
position. rear seat that will accommodate
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑15 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing a rear‐facing child restraint, a
including important safety system has turned off the right rear‐facing child restraint should not
information. front passenger frontal airbag, no be installed in the vehicle, even if
system is fail-safe. No one can the airbag is off.
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)

If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder
system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
System) on page 2‑45 for how and that came with the child restraint.
where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as it
using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the
secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint.
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
(LATCH System) on page 2‑45 for system has turned off the right
top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
Do not secure a child seat in a airbag, the off indicator on the
position without a top tether anchor 4. Push the latch plate into the
passenger airbag status
if a national or local law requires buckle until it clicks.
indicator should light and stay lit
that the top tether be anchored, or if when you start the vehicle. See Position the release button on
the instructions that come with the Passenger Airbag Status the buckle, so that the safety
child restraint say that the top strap Indicator on page 4‑15. belt could be quickly unbuckled
must be anchored. if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
In Canada, the law requires that the seat.
a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

instructions regrading the use of

the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 6. To tighten the belt, push down
all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the If a child restraint has been installed
set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to and the on indicator is lit, see “If
tighten the lap portion of the belt the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
and feed the shoulder belt back Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
into the retractor. When installing System on page 2‑30 for more
a forward-facing child restraint, information.
it may be helpful to use your To remove the child restraint,
knee to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's

Storage 3-1
Storage Storage Additional Storage

Compartments Features
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 3-1 Instrument Panel Storage Cargo Cover
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 There may be a storage For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 compartment on the instrument it to cover items in the rear of the
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-1 panel. Pull the handle to open. vehicle.
Additional Storage Features To remove the cover from the
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Glove Box vehicle, pull both ends toward each
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on other. To reinstall, place each end of
the lever. the cover in the holes behind the
Roof Rack System rear seat.
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Cupholders
Convenience Net
Two cupholders are in the center
console. Cupholders may be located This vehicle may have a
in the second row seat armrest. To convenience net located in the rear
access, pull the armrest down. of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo
tie-downs for storing small loads.
Center Console Storage Do not use the net to store heavy
For vehicles with center console loads.
storage, use the lever on the front
to open.

3-2 Storage
Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack— like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is To prevent damage or loss of cargo
being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and this could cause a collision, The roof rack crossrails can be
rack will make the vehicle's center
and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, locked in four positions along the
carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden roof rack side rails.
than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers,
vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
Certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
This vehicle may be equipped with occasionally stop the vehicle to
a roof rack. For roof racks that do make sure the cargo remains in its
not have cross rails included, place. Do not exceed the maximum
GM Certified cross rails can be vehicle capacity when loading the
purchased as an accessory. See vehicle. For more information on
your dealer for additional vehicle capacity and loading, see
information. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.

Storage 3-3
Try sliding the crossrails forward

and backward to ensure that they
are correctly secured and that the
levers stay tight to the cross rails.
Do not stand on the plastic lower
body panels when loading cargo
on the luggage carrier.
When the roof rack is not in use,
lock one crossrail at the furthest
forward position and lock the other
crossrail at the furthest rearward
position to reduce wind noise.
Lift the lever to release and move Push the lever down to completely
the crossrail. engage into the side rail holes.
Position the crossrail on both sides Slide the crossrails back and forth
of the vehicle at the same time. until the lock pins engage in the
holes and a click is heard as the
pins align and the crossrail locks.

3-4 Storage
2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 4-1
Instruments and Warning Lights, Gauges, and

Indicators
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Controls Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . .
4-20
4-20
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Traction Control System
Instrument Panel Overview Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-21
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-22
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6 Engine Coolant Temperature Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-22
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-14 High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-15 Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Rear Window Wiper/ Passenger Airbag Status Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-16
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 4-9 Information Displays
Malfunction
Clock (Without Date Driver Information
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Brake System Warning
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4-2 Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Messages Object Detection System Vehicle Personalization

Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-34
Battery Voltage and Charging Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 OnStar® System
Brake System Messages . . . . 4-28 Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-32 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-32
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-28 Anti-Theft Alarm System
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Engine Cooling System Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-32
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-30 Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-33
Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-30 Vehicle Reminder
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-30 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-31

2 NOTES

Instrument Panel Overview

A. Air Vents on page 7‑6. H. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11. P. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals Navigation System (If Park on page 8‑32.
on page 5‑3. Exterior Lamp Equipped). See Navigation Q. Fuel Economy Mode on
Controls on page 5‑1. Fog System Manual. page 8‑37 (If Equipped).
Lamps on page 5‑3 (If I. Cruise Control on page 8‑44. R. StabiliTrak System on
Equipped). J. Instrument Panel Illumination page 8‑43.
C. Instrument Cluster on Control on page 5‑4. S. Cupholders on page 3‑1.
page 4‑12. K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on T. Power Outlets on page 4‑10.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 4‑6.
page 4‑7. Rear Window U. CD Player on page 6‑19.
L. Horn on page 4‑7.
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑8. V. Driver Information Center
M. Steering Wheel Controls on Buttons. See Driver Information
E. Power Door Locks on page 4‑6.
page 1‑7. Center (DIC) on page 4‑24.
N. Ignition Positions on page 8‑28. W. Hazard Warning Flashers on
F. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 3‑1. O. Climate Control Systems on page 5‑2.
page 7‑1 or Automatic Climate X. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
G. Safety Locks on page 1‑7. Control System on page 7‑3.

Controls 3. Pull the lever up to lock the OnStar® System on page 6‑43,
steering wheel in place. Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (Voice
while driving.
Adjustment Recognition) on page 6‑46 or
Bluetooth (Navigation) on
Steering Wheel Controls page 6‑58, or the separate
navigation manual for more
information.
$ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to
select an audio source.
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. Toggle up or down to select the next
For vehicles with audio steering or previous favorite radio station or
To adjust the steering wheel: wheel controls, some audio controls CD track, DVD, if equipped, track,
1. Pull the lever down. can be adjusted at the steering or MP3 track.
wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up or + x − (Volume): Press + to
down and in or out to a b / g (Push to®Talk): For vehicles
increase the volume, press − to
comfortable position. with an OnStar , Bluetooth®,
or navigation system, press to decrease the volume.
interact with those systems. See

Horn Move the lever to one of the Windshield Washer

following positions: Pull the lever toward you to spray
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to 8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the washer fluid on the windshield. The
sound the horn. lever to z and then release. The spray continues until the lever is
wipers stop after one wipe. released. The wipers will run a
Windshield Wiper/Washer few times. See Washer Fluid on
( (Off): Turns the wipers off. page 9‑21 for information on filling
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes): the windshield washer fluid
The time between wipes can be reservoir.
adjusted. Turn the & band up for
more frequent wipes or down for { WARNING
less frequent wipes.
In freezing weather, do not use
1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. your washer until the windshield
2 (High Speed): Fast wipes. is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen windshield, blocking your vision.
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
The windshield wiper/washer lever should be replaced. See Wiper
is located on the right side of the Blade Replacement on page 9‑26.
steering column. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.

Rear Window Wiper/ 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a from Global Positioning System
delay between wipes. (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, and
Washer vehicle speed information.
The rear wiper controls are on the = (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
end of the windshield wiper lever. long periods of time with objects
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its that may interfere with the antenna's
starting position when released. ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Multi-Band Antenna on
The windshield washer reservoir is page 6‑18 for the location of the
used for the windshield and the rear vehicle's antennas. The compass
window. Check the fluid level in the system is designed to operate for a
reservoir if either washer is not certain number of miles or degrees
working. See Washer Fluid on of turn before needing a signal from
page 9‑21. the GPS satellites. When the
compass display shows CAL, drive
{ WARNING the vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
In freezing weather, do not use GPS signal. The compass system
Press the upper or lower portion of your washer until the windshield will automatically determine when
the button to control the rear wiper is warmed. Otherwise the washer GPS signal is restored and provide
and rear wiper delay. fluid can form ice on the a heading again. See Compass
The system turns off when the windshield, blocking your vision. Messages on page 4‑28 for more
button is returned to the middle information on the messages that
position. Compass may be displayed for the compass.
Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous The vehicle may have a compass

rear window wipes. display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
Clock (With Date Display) 6. To save the time or date and 3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
return to the Time and Date 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
The infotainment system controls,
Settings menu, press the 0 select MM/DD (month/day) or
located on the instrument panel, are
used to access the time and date BACK button at any time or DD/MM (day/month).
settings through the menu system. press the MENU/SEL knob after
adjusting the minutes or year. Setting the Auto Time Adjust
See Operation on page 6‑7 for
information about how to use the Setting the 12/24 Hour Format 1. Turn the infotainment
menu system. system ON.
1. Turn the infotainment
Setting the Time and Date system ON. 2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
1. Turn the infotainment 2. Press the CONFIG button and
system ON. select Time and Date Settings. 3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to

2. Press the CONFIG button and
turn Auto Time Adjust on or off.
select Time and Date Settings. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. select the 12 hour or 24 hour 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
display format. select Time Zone, and then
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select the Time Zone.
adjust the highlighted value. Setting the Month & Day 6. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to Format turn Daylight Savings on or off.
select the next value. 1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.

Clock (Without Date 6. To save the time and return to console storage, on the rear of the
the Time Settings menu, press center console storage, and in the
Display) rear cargo compartment.
the 0 BACK button at any time
The infotainment system controls, or press the SELECT button To use the outlets, remove the
located on the instrument panel, are after adjusting the minutes. cover. Close the outlet cover, when
used to access the time and date not in use.
settings through the menu system. Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
See Operation on page 6‑7 for Notice: If electrical devices are
1. Turn the infotainment
information about how to use the left plugged into a power outlet,
system ON.
menu system. the battery may drain causing the
2. Press the CONFIG button and vehicle not to start or damage to
Setting the Time select Time Settings, or press the battery. This would not be
1. Turn the infotainment the H button. covered by the vehicle warranty.
system ON. Always unplug all electrical
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. devices when turning off the
2. Press the CONFIG button and 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to vehicle.
select Time Settings, or press select the 12 hour or 24 hour Certain electrical accessories
the H button. display format. may not be compatible with the
3. Select Set Time. accessory power outlets and could
Power Outlets result in blown vehicle or adapter
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
The accessory power outlets can fuses. If you experience a problem,
adjust the highlighted value.
be used to connect electrical see your dealer for additional
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to information on the accessory power
equipment, such as a cellular
select the next value. outlet.
phone.
There are four accessory power
outlets in the following locations,
below the CD slot, inside the center

Notice: Adding any electrical Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
equipment to the vehicle can could be a problem with a vehicle
damage it or keep other Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
components from working as lights work together to indicate a
they should. The repairs would
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
not be covered by the vehicle Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
warranty. Do not use equipment signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
exceeding maximum amperage before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
rating of 20 amperes. Check with to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
your dealer before adding replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
electrical equipment. warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
When adding electrical equipment, prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
be sure to follow the installation Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
instructions included with the could be a problem with a vehicle
equipment. function. Some warning lights come
Notice: Improper use of the on briefly when the engine is started
power outlet can cause damage to indicate they are working.
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power
outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.

Instrument Cluster
US Version Shown, Canada Similar

Speedometer Tachometer Here are some situations that can

occur with the fuel gauge. None of
The vehicle's speed can be selected The tachometer displays the engine these indicate a problem with the
to display on the Driver Information speed in revolutions per fuel gauge.
Center (DIC) and the speedometer minute (rpm).
. At the service station, the fuel
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)
or miles per hour (mph). Telltales on Fuel Gauge pump shuts off before the gauge
the speedometer indicate whether reads full.
kilometers or miles were chosen. . It takes a little more or less
The DIC will show the vehicles fuel to fill up than the gauge
speed after the limit on the indicated. For example, the
speedometer has been reached. gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
Odometer United States Canada took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
The odometer shows how far the
When the ignition is on, the fuel the tank.
vehicle has been driven, in either
gauge shows about how much fuel . The gauge moves a little while
kilometers or miles.
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. turning a corner or speeding up.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
An arrow on the fuel gauge . The gauge takes a few seconds
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
indicates the side of the vehicle the to stabilize after the ignition is
new odometer installed, the new
fuel door is on. turned on, and goes back to
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is The gauge will first indicate empty empty when the ignition is
set at zero and a label is put on the before the vehicle is out of fuel and turned off.
driver's door to show the old the low fuel light comes on, but the
mileage reading. vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.

Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt

Temperature Gauge Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light The passenger safety belt reminder
light is by the passenger airbag
There is a driver safety belt status indicator.
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
United States Canada
This gauge measures the

temperature of the vehicle's engine.
If the indicator needle moves to the When the engine is started this light
hot side of the gauge towards the and the chime come on and stay on
colored line, the engine is too hot. When the engine is started this light for several seconds to remind the
A temperature indicator light will and a chime come on and stay on passenger to fasten their safety belt.
turn on. for several seconds to remind The light also begins to flash.
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
If the vehicle has been operated The light also begins to flash. This cycle repeats if the passenger
under normal driving conditions, and remains unbuckled and the vehicle
the temperature indicator light This cycle repeats if the driver is moving.
comes on, pull off the road, stop the remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving. If the passenger safety belt is
vehicle and turn off the engine as buckled, neither the chime nor the
soon as possible. If the driver safety belt is already light comes on.
buckled, neither the light nor chime
The front passenger safety belt
come on.
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic

device. To turn off the warning light { WARNING
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the If the airbag readiness light stays
safety belt. on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
Airbag Readiness Light the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in United States
This light shows if there is an the vehicle might not inflate in a
electrical problem. The system crash, or they could even inflate
check includes the airbag sensor, without a crash. To help avoid
the pretensioners, the airbag injury, have the vehicle serviced
modules, the wiring and the crash right away.
sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on Passenger Airbag Status Canada
page 2‑22. Indicator When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
sensing system. See Passenger
for on and off, for several seconds
Sensing System on page 2‑30 for
as a system check. If you are using
important safety information. The
remote start to start the vehicle from
overhead console has a passenger
a distance, if equipped, you may not
airbag status indicator.
see the system check. Then, after
The airbag readiness light comes on several more seconds, the status
and stays on for several seconds indicator will light either ON or OFF,
when the vehicle is started. Then or either the on or off symbol to let
the light turns off. you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is system. Have it checked by your

lit on the passenger airbag status WARNING (Continued) dealer. Driving while this light is on
indicator, it means that the right could drain the battery.
front passenger frontal airbag is away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑15 for more When this light comes on, the Driver
enabled (may inflate). Information Center (DIC) also
information, including important
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information. displays a message.
lit on the passenger airbag status See Battery Voltage and Charging
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
Charging System Light Messages on page 4‑28.
turned off the right front passenger This light and a Transport Mode On
frontal airbag. message display when the vehicle
is in Transport Mode. For more
If, after several seconds, both status information, see Key and Lock
indicator lights remain on, or if there Messages on page 4‑31.
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the If a short distance must be driven
passenger sensing system. See The charging system light comes on with the light on, be sure to turn off
your dealer for service. briefly when the ignition is turned all accessories, such as the radio
on, but the engine is not running, as and air conditioner.
{ WARNING a check to show the light is working.
Malfunction
The light turns off when the engine
If the airbag readiness light ever is started. If it does not, have the Indicator Lamp
comes on and stays on, it means vehicle serviced by your dealer.
that something may be wrong A computer system called OBD II
If the light stays on, or comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
with the airbag system. To help while driving, there may be a Generation) monitors operation of
avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging the fuel, ignition, and emission
have the vehicle serviced right
control systems. It ensures that
(Continued)

emissions are at acceptable levels Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a
for the life of the vehicle, helping to continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways:
produce a cleaner environment. on, after a while, the emission Light Flashing: A misfire condition
controls might not work as well, has been detected. A misfire
the vehicle's fuel economy might increases vehicle emissions and
not be as good, and the engine could damage the emission control
might not run as smoothly. This system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
could lead to costly repairs that and service might be required.
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. The following can prevent more
This light comes on when the serious damage to the vehicle:
Notice: Modifications made to the
ignition is on, but the engine is not engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
running, as a check to show it is intake, or fuel system of the
working. If it does not, have the
. Avoid hard accelerations.
vehicle or the replacement of the
vehicle serviced by your dealer. original tires with other than
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the check engine light comes on those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the
and stays on, while the engine is Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled as
running, this indicates that there is affect the vehicle's emission soon as it is possible.
an OBD II problem and service is controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to If the light continues to flash, when
required.
these systems could lead to it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Malfunctions often are indicated by Find a safe place to park the
costly repairs not covered by the
the system before any problem is vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at
vehicle warranty. This could also
apparent. Being aware of the light least 10 seconds, and restart the
result in a failure to pass a
can prevent more serious damage engine. If the light is still flashing,
required Emission Inspection/
to the vehicle. This system assists follow the previous steps and see
Maintenance test. See
the service technician in correctly your dealer for service as soon as
Accessories and Modifications
diagnosing any malfunction. possible.
on page 9‑4.

Light On Steady: An emission

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and
control system malfunction has with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
been detected on the vehicle. causes the engine not to run as
Diagnosis and service might be efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local
required. cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin
stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission
An emission system malfunction changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle.
might be corrected. hesitation on acceleration, Failure to pass this inspection could
. Make sure the fuel cap is fully or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle
installed. See Filling the Tank on These conditions might go away registration.
page 8‑56. The diagnostic once the engine is warmed up. Here are some things to know to
system can determine if the If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection:
fuel cap has been left off or conditions occurs, change the
improperly installed. A loose or
. The vehicle will not pass this
fuel brand used. It will require at inspection if the check engine
missing fuel cap allows fuel to least one full tank of the proper
evaporate into the atmosphere. light is on with the engine
fuel to turn the light off. running, or if the key is in ON/
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the See Recommended Fuel on RUN and the light is not on.
light off. page 8‑54. . The vehicle will not pass this
. If the vehicle has been driven If none of the above have made inspection if the OBD II
through a deep puddle of water, the light turn off, your dealer can (on-board diagnostic) system
the vehicle's electrical system check the vehicle. The dealer determines that critical emission
might be wet. The condition is has the proper test equipment control systems have not been
usually corrected when the and diagnostic tools to fix any completely diagnosed by the
electrical system dries out. A mechanical or electrical problems system. The vehicle would be
few driving trips should turn the that might have developed. considered not ready for
light off. inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is

designed to evaluate critical { WARNING
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take The brake system might not be
several days of routine driving. working properly if the brake
If this has been done and the system warning light is on.
vehicle still does not pass the United States Canada Driving with the brake system
inspection for lack of OBD II warning light on can lead to a
system readiness, your dealer The brake indicator light should crash. If the light is still on after
can prepare the vehicle for come on briefly as the engine is the vehicle has been pulled off
inspection. started. If it does not come on have the road and carefully stopped,
the vehicle serviced by your dealer. have the vehicle towed for
Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake service.
Light system warning light comes on
If the light comes on while driving, a
when the parking brake is set. The
The vehicle brake system consists light stays on if the parking brake chime sounds. Pull off the road and
of two hydraulic circuits. If one does not fully release. If it stays on stop. The pedal might be harder to
circuit is not working, the remaining after the parking brake is fully push or go closer to the floor.
circuit can still work to stop the released, there is a brake problem. It might also take longer to stop.
vehicle. For normal braking Have the brake system inspected If the light is still on, have the
performance, both circuits need to immediately. vehicle towed for service. See
be working Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑72.

Antilock Brake System not antilock brakes. If the regular See Traction Control System (TCS)
brake system warning light is also on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
(ABS) Warning Light on, the vehicle does not have System on page 8‑43 for more
antilock brakes and there is a information.
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light StabiliTrak® OFF Light
on page 4‑19.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Driver
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake Information Center (DIC) on
System (ABS), this light comes on page 4‑24 for all brake related DIC
briefly when the engine is started. messages.
If the light does not come on, have it Traction Off Light This light comes on when the
fixed so it will be ready to warn if StabiliTrak system is turned off.
there is a problem. If the Traction Control System (TCS)
If the ABS light stays on, turn the is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ignition off. If the light comes on StabiliTrak system is off, the system
while driving, stop as soon as it is does not assist in controlling the
safely possible and turn the ignition vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the
off. A chime may also sound when StabiliTrak system and the warning
the light comes on steady. Then This light comes on if the Traction light turns off.
start the engine again to reset the Control System (TCS) either has a Check the DIC for applicable
system. If the ABS light stays on, problem or is turned off. DIC messages. See Ride Control
or comes on again while driving, the messages appear in the DIC display System Messages on page 4‑31
vehicle needs service. If the regular to help explain. See Ride Control for more information.
brake system warning light is not System Messages on page 4‑31
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but for more information.

See Traction Control System (TCS) If the TCS warning light comes on When the Light is On Steady
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak and stays on while driving, the This indicates that one or more of
System on page 8‑43 for more vehicle needs service. the tires are significantly
information. Check the Driver Information Center underinflated.
(DIC) for applicable messages. See A tire pressure message in the
Traction Control System Ride Control System Messages on Driver Information Center (DIC), can
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light page 4‑31 for more information. accompany the light. See Tire
See Traction Control System (TCS) Messages on page 4‑33 for more
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak information. Stop as soon as
System on page 8‑43 for more possible, and inflate the tires to the
information. pressure value shown on the tire
loading information label. See Tire
Tire Pressure Light Pressure on page 9‑46 for more
®
information.
The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS) When the Light Flashes First and
indicator/warning light comes on Then is On Steady
briefly while starting the engine. This indicates that there may be a
If it does not, have the vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure
serviced by your dealer. If the Monitor System. The light flashes
system is working normally the For vehicles with a tire pressure for about a minute and stays on
indicator light then goes off. monitoring system, this light comes steady for the remainder of the
on briefly when the engine is ignition cycle. This sequence
The indicator/warning light flashes repeats with every ignition cycle.
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire See Tire Pressure Monitor
is working to control the vehicle on Operation on page 9‑49 for more
a low traction surface. Pressure Monitoring System.
information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light the center console near the shifter,
is pressed. For vehicles with a
Driver Information Center (DIC) an
{ WARNING ECO Mode On message displays.
Do not keep driving if the oil See Fuel System Messages on
pressure is low. The engine can
The oil pressure light should come Press the switch again to turn off
become so hot that it catches fire.
on briefly as the engine is started. the light and exit the fuel
Someone could be burned. Check saver mode.
If it does not come on have the
the oil as soon as possible and vehicle serviced by your dealer.
have the vehicle serviced.
If the light comes on and stays on, it Low Fuel Warning Light
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have
covered by the vehicle warranty. some other system problem. See
Always follow the maintenance your dealer.
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil. Fuel Economy Light United States Shown, Canada
Similar
This light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition is turned
on as a check to indicate it is
working. If it does not come on,
have it fixed.
For vehicles with the fuel economy The low fuel warning light is a circle
mode light, it comes on when the located on the fuel gauge. This light
eco (economy) switch, located on comes on and a chime sounds

periodically when the vehicle is low High-Beam on Light The light goes out when the fog
on fuel. The light goes off when fuel lamps are turned off. See Fog
is added to the fuel tank. Lamps on page 5‑3 for more
For vehicles with a Driver information.
Information Center (DIC), see Fuel
System Messages on page 4‑30 Lamps on Reminder
for more information.
Security Light The high-beam on light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 5‑1 for more
For vehicles with the lamps on
information.
reminder light, it comes on when the
lights are in use.
Fog Lamp Light
This light comes on if there is a
problem with the security system,
or if the vehicle has been
tampered with.
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 1‑12.
The fog lamp light comes on when

the fog lamps are in use.

Cruise Control Light Information Displays It also shows the shift lever position,
the odometer, and the direction the
vehicle is driving.
Driver Information
Center (DIC) DIC Buttons (with V shown, SET/
CLR version similar)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). It displays
information about the vehicle and
The cruise control light is white warning messages if there is a
whenever the cruise control is set system problem detected. DIC
and turns green when the cruise messages display in the center of
control is active. the instrument panel cluster. See
The light turns off when the cruise Vehicle Messages on page 4‑27 for
control is turned off. See Cruise more information.
Control on page 8‑44 for more The vehicle may also have features
information. that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑34 for
more information. MENU: Press this button to get to
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
DIC Operation and Displays Information Menu.
Use the DIC buttons located in the wx: Use these buttons to scroll
center of the instrument panel to through the items in each menu.
access different displays. The DIC A small marker will move along the
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system page as you scroll through the
information, and warning messages. items. This shows where each page
is in the menu.

V or SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use Trip 1 and Trip 2 economy can be reset by pressing
this button to set or clear the menu This display shows the current V or SET/CLR while the Average
item when it is displayed. distance traveled, in either Fuel Economy display is showing.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since The display may not reset to zero.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
the last reset for the trip odometer. Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Press the MENU button until Trip/ The trip odometer can be reset to
Fuel Information Menu is displayed. zero by pressing the trip reset stem This display shows the current
fuel economy in either liters per
Then press x to scroll through the or V or SET/CLR while the trip 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
following menu items: odometer display is showing. per gallon (mpg). This number
. Trip 1 Fuel Range reflects only the fuel economy that
the vehicle has right now and
. Trip 2 This display shows the approximate changes frequently as driving
. Fuel Range distance the vehicle can be driven conditions change. Unlike average
without refueling. The fuel range economy, this display cannot be
. Average Fuel Economy estimate is based on an average reset.
. Instantaneous Fuel Economy of the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the Average Vehicle Speed
. Average Vehicle Speed
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel This display shows the average
. Timer tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. speed of the vehicle in kilometers
. Digital Speedometer Average Fuel Economy per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is
. Navigation Turn-by-Turn This display shows the approximate calculated based on the various
. Blank average liters per 100 kilometers vehicle speeds recorded since the
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon last reset of this value. The average
(mpg). This number is calculated
speed can be reset by pressing V
based on the number of L/100 km
(mpg) recorded since the last time or SET/CLR while the Average
this menu item was reset. The fuel Vehicle Speed display is showing.

Timer Turn-by-Turn Unit

This display can be used as a timer. This display is used for the OnStar Press V or SET/CLR to enter the
To start the timer, press V or SET/ or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
unit menu. Then press w or x to
CLR while Timer is displayed. The guidance. See OnStar® System on
page 4‑39 or the Navigation switch between US or Metric when
display will show the amount of time
manual, if the vehicle has the Unit display is active. Press V
that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the navigation, for more information. or SET/CLR to confirm the setting.
ignition is off. Time will continue to This will change the displays on the
Blank Display cluster and DIC to either metric or
be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being This display shows no information. English (US) measurements.
shown on the DIC. The timer will Vehicle Information Menu Tire Pressure
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes Items
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after The display will show a vehicle with
which the display will return to zero. Press the MENU button until Vehicle the approximate pressures of all
Information Menu is displayed. Then four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
To stop the timer, press V or SET/ in either pounds per square
CLR briefly while Timer is displayed. press x to scroll through the
inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).
To reset the timer to zero, press and following menu items:
Any time the tire pressures are
hold V or SET/CLR. . Unit adjusted the system needs to
Digital Speedometer . Tire Pressure relearn the new pressures. To
The speedometer shows how fast . Remaining Oil Life relearn the tire pressures press V or
the vehicle is moving in either SET/CLR while the Tire Pressure
. Blank display is active. The display will
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer ask for confirmation of a relearn.
cannot be reset. Press w or x to select Yes or No.
Then press V or SET/CLR to
confirm the selection. See Tire

Pressure Monitor System on Remember, the Oil Life display must Vehicle Messages
page 9‑49 and Tire Pressure be reset after each oil change. It
Monitor Operation on page 9‑49 for will not reset itself. Also, be careful Messages are displayed on the DIC
more information. not to reset the Oil Life display to notify the driver that the status of
accidentally at any time other than the vehicle has changed and that
Remaining Oil Life when the oil has just been changed. some action may be needed by the
This display shows an estimate of It cannot be reset accurately until driver to correct the condition.
the oil's remaining useful life. the next oil change. To reset the Multiple messages may appear one
If “Remaining Oil Life 99%” is engine oil life system, press V or after another.
displayed, that means 99% of the SET/CLR while the Oil Life display Some messages may not require
current oil life remains. is active. The display will ask for immediate action, but you can press
When the remaining oil life is low, confirmation of a reset. Press w or V or SET/CLR to acknowledge that
the “Change Engine Oil Soon” x to select Yes or No. Then press you received the messages and to
message will appear on the display. V or SET/CLR to confirm the clear them from the display. Some
See Engine Oil Messages on selection. See Engine Oil Life messages cannot be cleared from
page 4‑30. The oil should be System on page 9‑11. the DIC display because they are
changed as soon as possible. See more urgent. These messages
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. In Blank Display require action before they can be
addition to the engine oil life system This display shows no information. cleared. You should take any
monitoring the oil life, additional messages that appear on the
maintenance is recommended in the Compass display seriously and remember that
Maintenance Schedule in this The vehicle may have a compass in clearing the messages will only
manual. See Scheduled the Driver Information Center (DIC). make the messages disappear, not
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for See Compass on page 4‑8. correct the problem. You will find the
more information. possible messages that can be
displayed and some information
about them grouped by subject in
the following information.

Battery Voltage and Service Battery Charging Compass Messages

Charging Messages System
CAL
This message is displayed when
Battery Saver Active there is a fault in the battery This message is displayed when the
This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle to compass needs to be calibrated.
vehicle has detected that the battery your dealer for service. See Compass on page 4‑8.
voltage is dropping beyond a –––
reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages
system starts reducing certain Three dashes will be displayed if the
features of the vehicle that you may Brake Fluid Low compass needs service. See your
be able to notice. At the point that This message is displayed when the dealer for service.
features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low, see Brake
is displayed. It means that the Fluid on page 9‑22. Cruise Control Messages
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary Release Parking Brake Apply Brake Before Cruise
accessories to allow the battery to This message is displayed as a If this message displays when
recharge. reminder that the parking brake is attempting to activate cruise control,
on. Release it before you attempt to apply the brake and then try again.
Low Battery
drive. Cruise Set to XXX
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery This message will display when the
on page 9‑24 for more information. cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑44 for more
information.

Door Ajar Messages Rear Access Open Coolant Level Low Add
This message will display along with Coolant
Door Open
a symbol when the liftgate is open. This message will display if the
A door open symbol will be Close the liftgate completely. coolant is low, see Engine Coolant
displayed on the DIC showing on page 9‑15.
which door is open. If the vehicle Engine Cooling System
has been shifted out of P (Park), a Engine Overheated — Idle
“Door Open” message will also be Messages Engine
displayed. Close the door A/C Off Due to High This message displays when the
completely. Engine Temp engine coolant temperature is too
Hood Open This message displays when the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
engine coolant becomes hotter than idle until it cools down.
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood the normal operating temperature. Engine Overheated — Stop
is open. Close the hood completely. To avoid added strain on a hot Engine
engine, the air conditioning
Manually Close the Power compressor automatically turns off. This message displays and a
Liftgate When the coolant temperature continuous chime sounds if the
returns to normal, the air engine cooling system reaches
This message will display if the unsafe temperatures for operation.
power liftgate encounters multiple conditioning compressor turns back
on. You can continue to drive the Stop and turn off the vehicle as
obstacles on the same power cycle. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
After removing the obstructions, the vehicle.
severe damage. This message
liftgate will resume normal power If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled
operation. have the system repaired by your to a safe operating temperature.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.

High Coolant Temperature Engine Oil Low – Add Oil next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the
speed while this message is on, but
temperature is hot, see Engine engine oil level is too low. Check the
maximum acceleration and speed
Overheating on page 9‑18. oil level. See Engine Oil on
may be reduced. Anytime this
page 9‑10.
message stays on, the vehicle
Engine Oil Messages Oil Pressure Low – Stop should be taken to your dealer for
Change Engine Oil Soon Engine service as soon as possible.
This message displays when the This message displays if low oil Fuel System Messages
engine oil needs to be changed. pressure levels occur. Stop the
When you change the engine oil, be vehicle as soon as safely possible ECO Mode On
sure to reset the Oil Life System. and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been On some models, this message
See Engine Oil Life System on
corrected. Check the oil as soon as displays when the fuel economy
page 9‑11 and Driver Information
possible and have your vehicle mode has been turned on by
Center (DIC) on page 4‑24 for
serviced by your dealer. pressing the eco button near the
information on how to reset the
shift lever. See Fuel Economy Mode
system. See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10 and Scheduled Engine Power Messages
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for Fuel Level Low
more information. Engine Power Is Reduced
This message displays when the
Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine This message displays when the vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
vehicle's engine power is reduced. soon as possible.
This message displays when the Reduced engine power can affect
engine oil temperature is too hot. the vehicle's ability to accelerate. Tighten Gas Cap
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle If this message is on, but there
until it cools down. This message displays when the
is no reduction in performance,
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
proceed to your destination. The
fuel cap.
performance may be reduced the
Key and Lock Messages Service Park Assist Service All Wheel Drive
Replace Battery In Remote Key This message is displayed if there is If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
a problem with the park assist Drive (AWD) system, this message
This message displays when the system. Take the vehicle to your displays if a problem occurs with
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry dealer for service. this system. If this message
(RKE) transmitter needs to be appears, stop as soon as possible
replaced. Ride Control System and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
Transport Mode On Messages on the DIC display. If the message
This message displays when the All Wheel Drive Off is still displayed or appears again
ignition is held in START for when you begin driving, the AWD
15 seconds. The battery light may If your vehicle has the All-Wheel system needs service. See your
also be flashing when this message Drive (AWD) system, this message dealer.
is displayed. To turn this message displays when the rear drive system
off, start the vehicle and hold the is overheating. This message turns Service Traction Control
key in the START position for off when the rear drive system cools
This message displays when there
15 seconds. down. If the warning message stays
is a problem with the Traction
on for a while, you need to reset the
Control System (TCS). When this
warning message. To reset the
Object Detection System warning message, turn the ignition
message is displayed, the system
Messages will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
off and then back on again. If the
driving accordingly. See your dealer
message stays on, see your dealer
Park Assist Off right away. See All-Wheel Drive on
for service.
This message is displayed when the page 8‑38 for more information.
park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 8‑46.

Service Stabilitrak Traction Control On Anti-Theft Alarm System

This message displays if there is a This message displays when the Messages
problem with the StabiliTrak® Traction Control System (TCS) is
system. If this message appears, try first turned on. See Traction Control Theft Attempted
to reset the system. Stop; turn off System (TCS) on page 8‑41 for This message displays if the vehicle
the engine for at least 15 seconds; more information. detects a tamper condition.
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means Airbag System Messages Service Vehicle Messages
there is a problem. See your dealer
for service. The vehicle is safe to Service Airbag Service AC System
drive, however, you do not have the This message is displayed if there is This message is displayed if there is
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce a problem with the airbag system. a problem with the air conditioning
your speed and drive accordingly. Take the vehicle to your dealer for system. Take the vehicle to your
Stabilitrak Off service. dealer for service.
This message displays when the Safety Belt Messages Service Power Steering
StabiliTrak system is turned off. See
This message is displayed if there is
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43 Buckle Seatbelt a problem with the power steering
This message displays as a system. Take the vehicle to your
Traction Control Off reminder when the safety belt dealer for service.
is not buckled.
This message displays when the Service Vehicle Soon
Traction Control System (TCS) is
This message is displayed if there is
turned off. Adjust your driving
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
accordingly.
vehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages The low tire pressure warning light Transmission Messages
will also come on. See Tire
Service Tire Monitor System Pressure Light on page 4‑21. Service Transmission
This message displays if there is a If a tire pressure message appears This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure on the DIC, stop as soon as you problem with the transmission. See
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire can. Inflate the tires by adding air your dealer.
Pressure Monitor Operation on until the tire pressure is equal to the
page 9‑49 for more information. values shown on the Tire Loading Shift To Park
Information label. See Tires on This message displays when the
Tire Learning Active page 9‑40, Vehicle Load Limits on transmission needs to be shifted to
This message displays when the page 8‑24, and Tire Pressure on P (Park). This may appear when
system is learning new tires. See page 9‑46. attempting to remove the key from
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on You can receive more than one tire the ignition if the vehicle is not in
page 9‑49 for more information. pressure message at a time. To P (Park).
Tire Low Add Air To Tire read the other messages that may Transmission Hot – Idle
have been sent at the same time, Engine
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure press the set/reset button. The DIC
Monitor System (TPMS), this also shows the tire pressure values. This message displays and a chime
message displays when the See Driver Information Center (DIC) sounds if the transmission fluid in
pressure in one or more of the on page 4‑24. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
vehicle's tires is low. transmission fluid temperature high
This message also displays “Left can cause damage to the vehicle.
Front”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”, Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
or “Right Rear” to indicate the allow the transmission to cool. This
location of the low tire. message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle Reminder Vehicle 3. Press the center of the

MENU / SELECT knob to select
Messages Personalization the Vehicle Settings menu.
Ice Possible Drive With Care The audio system controls are used The following list of menu items will
This message is displayed when ice to access the personalization be available:
conditions are possible. menus for customizing vehicle . Climate and Air Quality
features.
Turn Wiper Control to . Comfort and Convenience
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
Intermittent First access the Configuration . Collision/Detection Systems
This message is displayed when Settings Menu. . Languages
attempting to adjust the intermittent MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the
wiper speed without intermittent
. Lighting
center of this knob to enter the
selected on the wiper control. See menus and select menu items. Turn
. Power Door Locks
Windshield Wiper/Washer on the knob to scroll through the . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
page 4‑7. menus. . Return to Factory Settings
0 BACK: Press to exit or move
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
backwards in a menu.
highlight the menu. Press the knob
Entering the Personalization to select it. Each of the menus is
Menus detailed in the following information.
All of the menus may not be
1. Turn the infotainment system on
available. Only those tied to the
and press the CONFIG button to
features on your vehicle will be
access the Configuration
shown.
Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.

Climate and Air Quality Air Conditioning Mode Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Select the Climate and Air Quality This will allow you to select whether When on, this feature will turn the
menu and the following will be or not the air conditioning comes on heated seats on when using remote
displayed: automatically the next time the start on cold days.
vehicle is started. “On” means that Press the MENU / SELECT knob
. Auto Fan Speed
the air conditioning will be on at when “Remote Start Auto Heat
. Air Conditioning Mode start up, regardless of whether it Seats” is highlighted to toggle
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats was on or off the last time the
vehicle was turned off. “Off” means between “On” or “Off”. Press 0
Auto Fan Speed the air conditioning will be off at the BACK to confirm the selection and
next start up, regardless of whether go back to the last menu.
This selection is available on
vehicles with the Automatic Climate it was on or off the last time the Comfort and Convenience
Control System. Choose from the vehicle was turned off. “Last
Setting” means that the when the Select the Comfort and
following blower speed settings:
vehicle is started the air conditioning Convenience menu and the
High: Increased speed. will resume whichever setting it was following will be displayed:
Low: Reduced speed. at the last time the vehicle was . Easy Exit Driver Seat
turned off.
Normal: Moderate speed. . Chime Volume
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Air Conditioning Mode” is
. Reverse Tilt Mirror
when “Auto Fan Speed” is highlighted. Turn the knob to
highlighted. Turn the knob to Easy Exit Driver Seat
highlight “On”, “Off”, or “Last
highlight “High”, “Normal”, or “Low”. Setting”. Press the knob to confirm This allows you to turn the easy exit
Press the knob to confirm the your selection and go back to the seat feature on or off.
selection and go back to the last menu. Press the MENU / SELECT knob
last menu. when “Easy Exit Driver Seat” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select

“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to Collision/Detection Systems Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
confirm and go back to the select the language. Press the knob
Select the Collision/Detection
last menu. to confirm and go back to the
Systems menu and the following
last menu.
Chime Volume will be displayed:
This allows the selection of the . Park Assist Lighting
chime volume level. Select the Lighting menu and the
Park Assist
Press the MENU / SELECT knob following will be displayed:
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
when “Chime Volume” is . Vehicle Locator Lights
Assist feature to be turned on or off.
. Exit Lighting
“Normal” or “High”. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the when “Park Assist” is highlighted. Vehicle Locator Lights
last menu. Turn the knob to select “On”, “Off”,
or “Tow Bar”. Press the knob to This allows the vehicle locator lights
Reverse Tilt Mirror confirm and go back to the to be turned on or off.
This allows you to turn the park tilt last menu. Press the MENU / SELECT knob
mirrors feature on or off. when “Vehicle Locator Lights” is
Languages highlighted to toggle between “On”
when “Reverse Tilt Mirror” is Select the Language menu and the or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
highlighted. Turn the knob to select following will be displayed: the selection and go back to the
“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to . English last menu.
confirm and go back to the Exit Lighting
. French
last menu.
. Spanish This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.

Press the MENU / SELECT knob between “On” or “Off”. Press 0 Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
when “Exit Lighting” is highlighted. BACK to confirm the selection and Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Turn the knob to select “Off”, go back to the last menu. and the following will be displayed:
“30 Seconds”, “1 Minute”,
or “2 Minutes”. Press the knob to Auto Door Unlock . Remote Unlock Light Feedback
confirm and go back to the This allows selection of which of the . Remote Lock Feedback
last menu. doors will automatically unlock when . Remote Door Unlock
Power Door Locks the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
. Memory Remote Recall
Select Power Door Locks and the Press the MENU / SELECT knob
following will be displayed: when “Auto Door Unlock” is . Remote Vehicle Start
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Remote Unlock Light Feedback
“All Doors”, “Driver Door”, or “Off”.
. Auto Door Unlock Press the knob to confirm and go When on, the exterior lamps will
back to the last menu. flash when unlocking the vehicle
. Delayed Door Lock with the RKE transmitter.
Delayed Door Lock
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Press the MENU / SELECT knob
When on, this feature will delay the when “Remote Unlock Light
When on, this feature will keep the locking of the doors. If you want to
driver's door from locking when the Feedback” is highlighted. Turn the
override the delay you can press the knob to select “Flash Lights” or
door is open. If off is selected, the power door lock on the instrument
Delayed Door Lock menu will be “Off”. Press the knob to confirm and
panel. go back to the last menu.
available.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Delayed Door Lock” is
when “Unlocked Door Anti Lock highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Out” is highlighted to toggle “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.

Remote Lock Feedback Memory Remote Recall Press the MENU / SELECT knob
This allows selection of what type of This allows the “Memory Remote when “Remote Vehicle Start” is
feedback is given when unlocking Recall” feature to be turned on or highlighted to toggle between “On”
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. off. “Memory Remote Recall” is or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
when the memorized settings will be the selection and go back to the
Press the MENU / SELECT knob last menu.
when “Remote Lock Feedback” is recalled as you unlock the vehicle.
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob Return to Factory Settings
“Lights and Horn”, “Lights Only”, when “Memory Remote Recall” is
Select “Return to Factory Settings”
“Horn Only”, or “Off”. Press the knob highlighted to toggle between “On”
to return all of the vehicle
to confirm and go back to the or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm personalization to the default
last menu. the selection and go back to the settings. Turn the knob to select
Remote Door Unlock last menu. “Yes” or “No”. Press the knob to
This allows selection of which doors Remote Vehicle Start confirm and go back to the
will unlock when pressing the unlock last menu.
This allows the “Remote Vehicle
button on the RKE transmitter. Start” to be turned on or off, if the
Press the MENU / SELECT knob vehicle has this feature.
when “Remote Door Unlock” is
“All Doors” or “Driver Door”. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.

OnStar® System ] : Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
advisors. the glove box.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, OnStar service is subject to the
voice‐activated calling and to give OnStar terms and conditions
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn included in the OnStar Subscriber
navigation. Information.
OnStar® uses several innovative Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar service cannot work unless
technologies and live advisors to Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, the vehicle is in a place where
provide a wide range of safety, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside OnStar has an agreement with a
security, navigation, diagnostics, Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation wireless service provider for service
and calling services. and Hands‐Free Calling are in that area. OnStar service also
available on most vehicles. Not all cannot work unless the vehicle is in
Automatic Crash Response a place where the wireless service
OnStar services are available on all
In a crash, built in sensors can vehicles. For more information see provider OnStar has hired for that
automatically alert an OnStar the OnStar Owner's Guide or area has coverage, network
advisor who is immediately visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or capacity and reception when the
connected to the vehicle to see if www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service is needed, and technology
you need help. OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR that is compatible with the OnStar
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY service. Not all services are
How OnStar Service Works available everywhere, particularly in
1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
Q : This blue button connects you speak with an OnStar advisor
remote or enclosed areas, or at all
to a specially trained OnStar advisor times.
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.

The OnStar system can record and The vehicle must have a working Your Responsibility
transmit vehicle information. This electrical system, including
Increase the volume of the radio if
information is automatically sent to adequate battery power, for the
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
an OnStar call center when Q is OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot If the light next to the OnStar
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the buttons is red, the system may not
control that may prevent OnStar
airbags or ACR system deploy. This
information usually includes the
from providing OnStar service at be functioning properly. Press Q
any particular time or place. Some and request a vehicle diagnostic.
vehicle's GPS location and, in the examples are damage to important
event of a crash, additional If the light appears clear (no light
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, is appearing), your OnStar
information regarding the crash that tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the subscription has expired and all
wireless phone network congestion. services have been deactivated.
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature OnStar Steering Wheel Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
of OnStar hands-free calling is Controls equipment is active.
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
can provide services where it is button that can be used to interact
located. with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
Location information about the page 4‑6 for more information.
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed On some vehicles, the mute button
and available. can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.

Lighting 5-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the

parking lamps together with the
following:
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting . Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1 . Taillamps
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 . License Plate Lamps
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 . Instrument Panel Lights
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-2 headlamps, together with the
Turn and Lane-Change previously listed lamps and lights.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Headlamp High/
Interior Lighting Low-Beam Changer
Instrument Panel Illumination 2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 The exterior lamp control is located Changer: Push the turn/lane
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 on the turn signal/lane change lever. change lever away from you to
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn turn the high beams on.
Lighting Features to operate the exterior lamps. Pull the lever towards you to return
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 O (Off): Turns the exterior to low beams.
lamps off.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):
Turns the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on the
exterior light.

5-2 Lighting
Daytime Running When the exterior lamp band is

turned to the headlamp position, the
Lamps (DRL) low-beam headlamps come on. The
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) other lamps that come on with the
system makes the low-beam headlamps will also come on.
headlamps come on at a reduced To idle your vehicle with the DRL
This indicator light turns on in the brightness in daylight when the off, move the shift lever to P (Park).
instrument panel cluster when the following conditions are met: The DRL will stay off until the shift
high beam headlamps are on. . The ignition is on. lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.
Flash-to-Pass . The exterior lamp band is in the
automatic position. The regular headlamp system
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with should be turned on when needed.
the low‐beams or Daytime Running
. The transmission is not in
Lamps (DRL) on or off. P (Park).
Hazard Warning Flashers
To flash the high beams, pull the
. The light sensor determines it is
daytime. | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
turn signal/lane change lever all the Press this button, located on the
way towards you. Then release it. . The parking brake is released. center of the instrument panel, to
Fully functional Daytime Running make the front and rear turn signal
Lamps (DRL) are required on all lamps flash on and off. This warns
vehicles first sold in Canada. others that you are having trouble.
When the DRL are on the taillamps, Press | again to turn the
sidemarker, instrument panel lights flashers off.
and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel cluster will be lit.

Lighting 5-3
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting # (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp
position when it is released. band on the lever to # and release
Signals
If after signaling a turn or a lane it, to turn the fog lamps on or off.
change the arrows flash rapidly or The band will return to its original
do not come on, a signal bulb may position.
be burned out. The parking lamps or low‐beam
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb headlamps must be on to use the
is not burned out, check the fuse, fog lamps.
see Fuses on page 9‑34 for more The fog lamps will go off whenever
An arrow on the instrument panel information. the high-beam headlamps are
cluster will flash in the direction of turned on. When the high‐beam
the turn or lane change. Fog Lamps headlamps are turned off, the fog
Move the lever all the way up or For vehicles with fog lamps, the lamps will come on again.
down to signal a turn. control is located on the turn signal/ Some localities have laws that
Raise or lower the lever until the lane change lever. require the headlamps to be on
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Use the fog lamps for better vision along with the fog lamps.
change. Hold it there until the lane in foggy or misty conditions.
change is complete.

5-4 Lighting
Interior Lighting 1 (Door): The lamp comes on Lighting Features

automatically when a door is
Instrument Panel opened. Entry Lighting
Illumination Control + (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
The dome lamp, cargo lamp and
This control is located on the foot lamp inside the vehicle come
Reading Lamps on when any door is opened, if the
instrument panel, to the left of
the steering column. The reading lamps are located on dome lamp is in the door position. In
the overhead console. These lamps addition, these lamps come on
D (Instrument Panel come on automatically when any when the Remote Keyless Entry
Brightness): Turn clockwise or door is opened. (RKE) unlock button is pressed.
counterclockwise to brighten or They stay on for 20 seconds or until
dim the lights. For manual operation, press the a door is opened. After the door is
button next to each lamp to turn it opened and then closed, the light
Dome Lamps on or off. remains on for 20 seconds, or until
The dome lamp controls are located the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
in the overhead console. To change
the settings, press the following:
* (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
is open.

Infotainment System 6-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Introduction
System CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Storage
6-21 Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 system's features.
Introduction Auxiliary Devices (Radio
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
6-28 { WARNING
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3 with CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . 6-31 Taking your eyes off the road for
Overview (Radio with extended periods could cause a
Rear Seat Infotainment crash resulting in injury or death
CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Seat Entertainment
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 to you or others. Do not give
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
extended attention to
Radio Phone entertainment tasks while driving.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-42
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Bluetooth (Infotainment This system provides access to
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 many audio and non audio listings.
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Bluetooth (Voice To minimize taking your eyes off the
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 road while driving, do the following
Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-58 while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.

6-2 Infotainment System
For more information, see Defensive Notice: Contact your dealer Navigation/Radio System
Driving on page 8‑3. before adding any equipment.
For vehicles with a navigation radio
This vehicle's infotainment system Adding audio or communication system, see the separate Navigation
may be equipped with a noise equipment could interfere with System manual.
reduction system which can work the operation of the vehicle's
improperly if the audio amplifier, engine, radio, or other systems, Theft-Deterrent Feature
engine calibrations, exhaust system, and could damage them. Follow
microphones, radio, or speakers are federal rules covering mobile The theft-deterrent feature works by
modified or replaced. This could radio and telephone equipment. learning a portion of the Vehicle
result in more noticeable engine Identification Number (VIN) to
The vehicle has Retained the infotainment system. The
noise at certain speeds. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, infotainment system does not
the audio system can be played operate if it is stolen or moved to
even after the ignition is turned off. a different vehicle.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑29 for more
information.

Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. AUX
. Selects a connected
external audio source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.

F. FAV K. k O. INFO
. Radio: Opens the . CD: Pauses the CD.
. Radio: Shows available
favorites list. information about the
L. CD current station.
G. TONE
. Selects the CD player .
. Opens the tone menu. CD: Shows available
when listening to a information about the
H. CONFIG different audio source. current track.
. Opens the settings menu. M. Z CD Eject P. 5/0
I. MENU/SEL . Removes a disc from the . Opens the phone
. Press: Opens the menus CD slot. main menu.
and selects menu items. N. l SEEK . Mutes the audio system.
. Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
. Radio: Seeks the next Q. H
station.
in a menu. Manually . Opens the clock menu.
. CD: Selects the next track
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio. or fast forwards within a R. 0 BACK
track. . Menu: Moves one
J. CD Slot
level back.
. Insert a CD.
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.

Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
. MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. MEM/DVD/AUX
. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxillary audio
source.

E. Buttons 1 to 6 J. CD/DVD Slot N. l SEEK

. Radio: Saves and selects . Insert a disc. . Radio: Seeks the next
favorite stations. station.
K. k (Play/Pause)
. MEM: Saves and selects . CD/DVD: Selects the next
. Radio: Pauses time shifted
favorite tracks and track or fast forwards
playlists. content.
within a track.
F. FAV
. CD/DVD: Pauses CD/DVD‐
A and DVD‐V playback.
. MEM: Selects the next
. Radio: Opens the Stops DVD‐V playback. track or fast forwards
favorites list. within a track.
. MEM: Pauses MEM
. MEM: Opens the playback. O. INFO
favorites list. . Radio: Shows available
G. TONE
L. O REC information about the
. CD/DVD: Records content current station.
. Opens the tone menu.
from audio CDs and MP3/ . CD/DVD: Shows available
H. CONFIG WMA CDs. information about the
. Opens the settings menu. . AUX: Records content current track.
I. MENU/SEL from USB mass storage . MEM: Shows available
devices. information about the
. Press: Opens menus and
selects menu items. M. Z CD Eject current track.
. Turn: Highlights menu . Removes a disc from the P. 5 / 0 (Phone/Mute)
items or sets values while CD/DVD slot. . Opens the phone
in a menu. Manually main menu.
selects radio stations while
. Mutes the audio system.

Q. DEL Automatic Switch‐Off Menu System

. MEM: Deletes the current If the infotainment system has been Controls
track from MEM. turned on after the ignition is turned
off, the system will turn off The MENU/SEL knob and the
R. 0 BACK automatically after ten minutes. 0 BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
. Menu: Moves one
Volume Control MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):
level back.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to Press to:
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character. adjust the volume. . Enter the menu system.
5 / 0 (Mute): For vehicles with . Select or activate the highlighted
Operation OnStar®, press and hold 5 / 0 to menu option.
Controls mute the infotainment system. Press . Confirm a set value.
and hold 5 / 0 again, or turn the . Turn a system setting on or off.
The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons, VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
Turn to:
multifunction knobs, menus that are For vehicles without OnStar®, press
shown on the display, and steering
. Highlight a menu option.
5 / 0 to mute the infotainment
wheel controls, if equipped. . Select a value.
system. Press 5 / 0 again, or turn
Turning the System On or Off the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute. 0 BACK: Press to:
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
. Exit a menu.
turn the system on and off. . Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
. Delete the last character in a
sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
move the highlighted bar. highlight the setting. highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
select the highlighted option. activate the setting. turn the function on or off.
Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
the menu indicates that it has a change the current value of the highlight the character.
submenu with other options. setting. 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to select the character.
confirm the setting.

Press the 0 BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance
the last character in the sequence and Bass
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source. 1. Press the TONE button.
1. Press the TONE button. 2. Select Fader or Balance.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value.
or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button. Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Select the value.
2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL
back to the Tone Settings menu.
button until the value changes
to 0.

Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) System Settings Auto Volume

For vehicles that have an equalizer: Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature
Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
1. Press the TONE button. feature can be turned off.
2. Select EQ. To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
3. Select the setting.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the number of available
1. Press the CONFIG button.
favorite pages.
2. Select Radio Settings.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume.
Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.

Maximum Startup Volume Radio k : Press to pause and resume

The maximum volume played when time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
the Radio with CD is first turned on AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
can be set. later in this section.
Control Buttons 1 to 6: Press to select preset
The buttons used to control the stations.
radio are:
RDS (Radio Data System)
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
radio on and choose between AM,
feature is available for use only on
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
FM stations that broadcast RDS
1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SEL: Turn to manually information. This feature only works
2. Select Radio Settings. search for stations. when the information from the radio
FAV: Press to open the station is available. In rare cases,
3. Select Maximum Startup a radio station could broadcast
Volume. favorites list.
incorrect information that causes the
4. Select the setting. l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to radio features to work improperly.
search for stations. Press and hold If this happens, contact the radio
5. Press the 0 BACK button to fast forward and rewind time station.
to go back to the System shifted data. See “Time Shifting
Configuration menu. (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” While the radio is tuned to an
later in this section. FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.

Radio Menus If the radio station is known: Station Lists

Radio menus are available for AM Press and hold g SEEK or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
and FM. l SEEK until the station on the 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
Press the MENU/SEL knob to open display is reached, then release receivable stations in the current
the main radio menu for that band. the button. reception area are displayed. If a
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD station list has not been created,
Selecting a Band an automatic station search
and MEM)
Press the RADIO/BAND button to is done.
choose AM, FM, or XM™, Briefly press l SEEK or g SEEK, 3. Select the station.
if equipped. The last station that to automatically search for the next
was playing starts playing again. available station. If a station is not Category Lists
found, the radio switches to a more Most stations that broadcast an
Selecting a Station sensitive search level. If a station RDS program type code specify the
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD) still is not found, the frequency that type of programming transmitted.
was last active begins to play. Some stations change the program
If the radio station is not known:
Manual Tuning type code depending on the
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK, content. The system stores the
to automatically search for the next Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select RDS stations sorted by program
available station. If a station is not the frequency on the display. type in the FM category list.
found, the radio switches to a more Favorites List To search for a programming type
sensitive search level. If a station determined by station:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play. 2. Select Favorites List. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the station. 2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.

3. Select the programming type. Storing a Station as a Favorite Time Shifting (Radio with
A list of stations that transmit CD/DVD and MEM)
Stations from all bands can be
programming of the selected
stored in any order in the favorite The radio with MEM time shift
type displays.
pages. feature can rewind 20 minutes of
4. Select the station. FM/AM content. While listening to
Up to six stations can be stored in
The category lists are updated each favorite page and the number the radio, the content from the
when the station lists are of available favorite pages can current station is always being
updated. be set. buffered.
Updating Station & Category Lists Storing a Station as a Favorite Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
If stations stored in the station list To store the station to a position in shift status bar. The status bar
can no longer be received. the list, press the corresponding shows the amount of content that is
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. stored in the buffer and the current
2. Select Update AM or FM Station Retrieving stations pause point.
List, if the stations stored in the Press the FAV button to open a To resume playback from the
station list are no longer favorite page or to switch to another current pause point, press the
received. A station search will be favorite page. Briefly press one of k button again. The radio is no
completed and the first station in the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the longer live, but played from the time
the updated list will play. station. shift buffer. A status bar displays
To cancel the station search, press below the station number.
the MENU/SEL knob. Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.

Press and release the g SEEK or Satellite Radio Control Buttons

l SEEK buttons to jump forward or Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite The buttons used to control the XM
back 30 seconds in the time shift Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite radio are:
buffer. Radio subscription can receive XM RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
When the radio station is changed, programming. radio on and choose between AM,
the buffer is cleared and FM, and XM™, if equipped.
automatically restarted for the XM Satellite Radio Service
current station. Content from a XM is a satellite radio service that is g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
previously tuned station is no longer to the previous or next station.
based in the 48 contiguous United
available. States and 10 Canadian provinces. FAV: Press to open the
The time shift feature is not XM Satellite Radio has a wide favorites list.
available while recording or with variety of programming and k : Press to pause and resume
other sources of playback. commercial-free music, time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle sound. A service fee is required to later in this section.
Turned Off receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at 1 to 6: Press to select preset
If AM/FM is paused when the
www.xmradio.com or call stations.
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.
station for up to 20 minutes. If the www.xmradio.ca or call Press to open the XM Satellite
vehicle is turned back on within 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Radio menu.
20 minutes, the radio resumes
playback from the paused point.

Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel Selecting a Channel Using the

MENU/SEL Knob
Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by
choose between the AM, FM and using g SEEK, l SEEK, the To select an XM channel using the
XM bands. The last channel played MENU/SEL knob, or the menu MENU/SEL knob:
in that band begins to play when system. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
that band is selected. highlight an XM channel, the
Selecting a Channel Using
XM Categories channel is selected after a short
g SEEK or l SEEK delay.
XM channels are organized in (Radio with CD)
categories. To select a channel using the menu:
. Press and release g SEEK or 1. Turn the menu knob and select
Removing or Adding Categories l SEEK to go to the previous Channel List.
Channels in a category that have or next channel.
2. Select the desired channel.
been removed can still be accessed . Press and hold g SEEK or
by using the g SEEK or l SEEK l SEEK to scroll through the Selecting a Channel Using the
buttons, or the MENU/SEL knob. Menu System
previous or next channel until
To add or remove categories: the channel is reached. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
1. Press the CONFIG button. Selecting a Channel Using 2. Select XM Category List.
2. Select Radio Settings. g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio 3. Select the category.
with CD/DVD and MEM) 4. Select the channel.
3. Select XM Categories.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Press and release g SEEK or
highlight the category. l SEEK to go to the previous or
next channel.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
remove or add the category.

Storing an XM Channel as a Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release the g SEEK or
Favorite CD/DVD and MEM) l SEEK buttons to go to the next
Channels from all bands can be The radio with MEM time shift or previous song in the time shift
stored in any order in the favorite feature can rewind 20 minutes of buffer.
pages. XM content. While listening to the When the channel is changed, the
Up to six channels can be stored in radio, the content from the current buffer is cleared and automatically
each favorite page and the number channel is always being buffered. restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
of available favorite pages can Press the k button to pause the station is no longer available.
be set. radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar The time shift feature is not
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
shows the amount of content that is available while recording or with
To store the channel to a position stored in the buffer and the current other sources of playback.
in the list, press and hold the pause point.
corresponding 1 to 6 button until Pausing XM with the Vehicle
the channel can be heard again. To resume playback from the Turned Off
current pause point, press the If XM is paused when the vehicle is
Retrieving Channels k button again. The radio is no turned off, the radio continues to
Press the FAV button to open a longer live, but played from the time buffer the current radio station for
favorite page or to change to shift buffer. A status bar displays up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
another favorite page. Briefly press below the channel number. turned back on within 20 minutes,
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve Press and hold the g SEEK or the radio resumes playback from the
the channel. paused point.
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.

XM Messages No Artist Info: The system is CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. No artist working properly. There are no
XL (Explicit Language
information is available at this channels available for the selected
Channels): These channels, or any
time on this channel. category.
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). No Title Info: The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
working properly. No song title this message alternates with the XM
XM Updating: The encryption code
information is available at this time Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
in the receiver is being updated, no
on this channel. label is needed to activate the
action is required. This process
No CAT Info: The system is service.
should take no longer than
30 seconds. working properly. No category Unknown: If this message is
information is available at this time received when tuned to channel 0,
Loading XM: The audio system is
on this channel. there could be a receiver fault.
acquiring and processing audio and
No Information: The system is Consult with your dealer.
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly. working properly. No text or Check Antenna: If this message
informational messages are does not clear within a short period
Channel Off Air: This channel is
available at this time on this of time, the receiver could have a
not currently in service. Tune in to
channel. fault. Consult with your dealer.
another channel.
No XM Signal: The system is XM Not Available: If this message
Channel Unauth: This channel is
working properly. The vehicle may does not clear within a short period
blocked or cannot be received with
be in a location where the XM signal of time, the receiver could have a
your XM Subscription package.
is being blocked. When the vehicle fault. Consult with your dealer.
Channel Unavailable: This is moved into an open area, the
previously assigned channel is no signal should return.
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.

Radio Reception AM Cellular Phone Usage

Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is Cellular phone usage can cause
can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at interference with the vehicle's radio.
reception if items such as cell phone night. The longer range can cause
chargers, vehicle convenience station frequencies to interfere with Multi-Band Antenna
accessories, and external electronic each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines The multi-band antenna is located
devices are plugged into the on the roof of the vehicle. The
accessory power outlet. If there is interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble antenna is used for the AM/FM
interference or static, unplug the radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite
item from the accessory power on the radio.
Radio Service System, and GPS
outlet. XM™ Satellite Radio Service (Global Positioning System); if the
FM vehicle has these features. Keep
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
the antenna clear of obstructions
FM signals only reach about 16 to digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous for clear reception. If the vehicle
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the has a sunroof and it is open, the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit United States, and in Canada. Just
performance of the AM/FM radio,
that automatically works to reduce as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, OnStar, XM system, and GPS can
interference, some static can occur, be affected.
especially around tall buildings or causing the sound to fade in and
hills, causing the sound to fade in out. In addition, traveling or standing
and out. under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.

Audio Players If the bottom surface of a disc is

dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a without any label, load one CD at
CD Player mild neutral detergent solution a time, and keep the CD player
The CD player can play audio CDs mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe and the loading slot free of
and MP3 CDs. the disc from the center to the foreign materials, liquids, and
outer edge. debris.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) CDs. Care of the CD Player Control Buttons
Care of CDs Do not add a label to a disc, as it The buttons used to control the CD
could get caught in the CD player. player are:
Sound quality can be reduced due If a label is needed, label the top of
to disc quality, recording method, CD: Press to choose between the
the recorded disc with a
quality of the music recorded, and CD and AUX player.
marking pen.
how the disc has been handled. l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to
Handle discs carefully and store Do not use disc lens cleaners
select tracks or to fast forward or
them in their original cases or other because they could contaminate the
rewind within a track.
protective cases away from direct lens of the disc optics and damage
sunlight and dust. If the bottom the CD player. INFO: Press to display additional
surface of a disc is damaged, the information about the CD that may
Notice: If a label is added to a
disc may not play properly or at all. be available.
CD, or more than one CD is
Do not touch the bottom surface of inserted into the slot at a time, MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.
a disc while handling it; this could or an attempt is made to play
damage the surface. Pick up discs Z (Eject): Press to remove
scratched or damaged CDs, the the CD.
by grasping the outer edges or the CD player could be damaged.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track, press again to resume
playback.

Inserting a CD Selecting a CD Track Fast Forward and Rewind

With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: Press and hold l SEEK or
insert a disc into the CD slot until it . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK g SEEK to fast forward or
is drawn in. rewind within the current track.
button to select the previous or
Removing a CD next track. Selecting an MP3 Track
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the Z button. Using the control buttons:
The disc is pushed out of the Using the CD Menu: . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
CD slot. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button to select the previous or
If the disc is not removed after it is 2. Select Tracks list. next track.
ejected, it is pulled back in after a . Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the track.
few seconds.
Using the CD Menu:
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing a CD or MP3 CD 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
Press the CD button, if there is a then set Shuffle Songs to On. 2. Select Playlists / Folders.
disc in the player it begins playing.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the 4. Select the track.
display depending on the data
stored.

Searching for MP3 Tracks CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
The search feature may take some the disc from the center to the
The CD/DVD player can play outer edge.
time to display the information after CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
reading the disc due to the amount MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs. Care of the CD/DVD Player
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it
disc is being read. 8 cm (3 in.) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label the
Tracks can be searched by: Care of CDs and DVDs top of the recorded disc with a
. Playlists Sound quality can be reduced due marking pen.
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
. Artists quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
. Albums how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
. Song Titles Handle discs carefully and store the CD/DVD player.
them in their original cases or other
. Genres protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a
sunlight and dust. If the bottom CD, or more than one CD is
. Folder View inserted into the slot at a time,
surface of a disc is damaged, the
To search for tracks: disc may not play properly or at all. or an attempt is made to play
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Do not touch the bottom surface of scratched or damaged CDs, the
a disc while handling it; this could CD player could be damaged.
2. Select Search. damage the surface. Pick up discs While using the CD player, use
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition
Song Titles, Genres, edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at
or Folder View. a time, and keep the CD player
If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of
4. Select the track. dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris.
mild neutral detergent solution

Control Buttons Removing a CD or DVD Using the menu:

The buttons used to control the Press the Z button. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
CD/DVD player are: 2. Select Tracks List.
The disc is pushed out of the
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose CD/DVD slot. 3. Select the track.
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX. If the disc is not removed after it is Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to few seconds. Press the k button to pause a CD
select tracks or to fast forward or or DVD‐A track. Press the k button
rewind within a track. Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
again to continue playing the track.
INFO: Press to display additional Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button if
information about the disc that may there is a disc in the player, it Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
be available. begins playing. Random Order
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and Press the MENU/SEL knob and
current track is shown on the then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Z (Eject): Press to remove
display depending on the data
a disc. Fast Forward and Rewind
stored.
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A, Press and hold the l SEEK or
or DVD‐V, press again to resume Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks g SEEK button to fast forward or
playback. Press and hold to stop a Using the control buttons: rewind within the current track.
DVD‐V disc.
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
Inserting a CD or DVD button to select the previous or
With the printed side facing up, next track.
insert a disc into the slot until it is . Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
drawn in.

Playing an MP3 CD or DVD Searching for MP3s on a CD To search for tracks:

or DVD 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root It is normal for the search feature to 2. Select Search.
directory (disc). take some time to display the
information after reading the disc 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
The search rate increases if the Song Titles, or Genres.
due to the amount of information
MENU/SEL knob is continuously
stored on the disc. The infotainment 4. Select the track. The search rate
turned while searching in a list.
system automatically switches to increases if the menu MENU/
Selecting an MP3 Track FM while the disc is being read. SEL knob is continuously turned
Using the control buttons: Files that do not have any meta while searching in a list.
data stored in the ID3 tag display as Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK Unknown.
button to select the previous or Order
next track. Tracks can be searched for by: Press the MENU/SEL knob and
. Playlists then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Using the CD or DVD Menu:

. Artists Recording an Audio or MP3
. Albums CD to MEM
. Song Titles See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
. Genres
4. Select the track. The number of objects in each

category is shown in parentheses
after the category.

Playing a DVD‐V Changing the Audio Stream

. Cursor RIGHT
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
. Cursor LEFT
System on page 6‑33 for 2. Select Audio Stream.
. Up Menu
information about how to control a
3. Select Change Audio Stream. Use the following actions to
Video DVD using the wireless
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V
remote control. 4. Press MENU/SEL to change the Disc while playing chapters.
Selecting a Chapter selection.
. Pause (Play)
Using the control buttons: Select Cancel to exit the menu.
. Chapter List
Pausing a DVD
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK . Title List
button to select the previous or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . DVD/DVD
next track. 2. Select Pause, to pause the disc.
Select Unpause to start
. DVD/AUX
playback. . AUX/DVD
Using DVD Menu:
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu . AUX/AUX
Use the following actions to To navigate the menu:
2. Select Chapter List.
navigate the title menu on a 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the chapter. DVD‐V Disc.
2. Select the action.
Selecting a Title . Select / Enter
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . Cursor UP
2. Select Title List. . Cursor DOWN
3. Select the title.

Mass Storage INFO: Press to display additional Recording to MEM

information about the MEM track
Media (MEM) that may be available. Press O REC, then select Record
Infotainment systems with MEM Current Song or Record All Songs
k : Press to pause the track on Disc. If the track has started
storage are able to record up to currently playing, press again to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from playing, the system will restart the
resume playback. track and begin recording from the
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM O REC: Press to record music beginning of the track. When the
player can also time shift audio from from a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive. song recording is completed, the
AM, FM, and XM™ radio. message Song Recorded to MEM
FAV (Favorites): Press to display displays, and there may be a slight
Music or content that is stored in MEM favorites. pause.
MEM that you did not create, 1‐6: Press to select a track or a
or have the right to distribute, must Songs recorded to MEM are stored
stored playlist. as the current date, disc and track
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle. MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. number.
Control Buttons Recording From Audio CDs Re-recording a Previously

Recorded Disc
The buttons used to control the The infotainment system can record
MEM player are: the current song playing or all songs If the disc or track has already been
from an audio CD to MEM. A status recorded to MEM, the message The
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select bar appears on the top of the Song(s) is Already Recorded
the MEM player. display when the recording process displays.
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to starts and disappears when the
select tracks or to fast forward or process has ended. Copy protected
rewind within a track. CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.

Stopping the Recording Recording From MP3/WMA Re-recording a Previously

Discs or USB Storage Devices Recorded Disc
Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to USB Host Support If the disc or track has already been
display the stop recording option. recorded to MEM, the message The
The USB connector uses the USB Song(s) is Already Recorded
Select Stop Recording Song
standards, 1.1 and 2.0. displays.
to MEM.
USB Supported Devices Stopping the Recording
Renaming Recorded Discs
. USB Flash Drives Press the O REC button while
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed. . Portable USB Hard Drives recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB storage device to display the
Recording to MEM
stop recording option. Select Stop
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs. Press O REC, then select Record Recording Song to MEM.
3. Select the disc. Current Song or Record Current
Deleting Tracks From MEM
Folder.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename Individual tracks and all tracks can
either one. The information stored by MEM is
be deleted from MEM.
titled according to the ID3 tag
5. Use the menu knob to enter To delete individual tracks, press
associated with it.
the character sequence. See and release the DEL button while
Operation on page 6‑7 for the track is playing.
more information.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.

Playing From MEM To search for tracks: To remove MEM favorites

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. categories:
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD 2. Select Search. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, 2. Select Radio Settings.
a track if MEM is already playing Song Titles, or Genres. 3. Select MEM Favorites.
from the previously recorded disc.
4. Select the track. The search rate 4. Remove the check mark from
1. Select Recorded Disc List. increases if the menu knob is the box to remove that MEM
2. Select the disc. continuously turned while favorites category.
searching in a list. Replace the check mark to re-add
Shuffle Songs the removed category.
Searching For a Track
Select the Shuffle Songs option Saving MEM Tracks as
Tracks can be searched for by: from the MEM menu to randomly Favorites
. Playlists play back tracks stored in MEM.
Favorites can be saved by pressing
. Artists Configuring MEM Favorites and holding one of the 1 to 6
. Albums buttons. Favorites can be stored
During MEM playback, press the
according to the following list:
. Song Titles FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite Playlist: Adds currently playing
. Genres categories are: track to the playlist selected.
The number of objects in each . Playlists Artist: Saves the artist associated
category is shown in parentheses with the currently playing track in
after the category.
. Artists
the indicated favorites position.
. Albums
. Genres

Album: Saves the album Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
(Radio with CD) Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
position. The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled
Genre: Saves the genre associated devices to be connected using the
using the controls on the device.
with the currently playing track in 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
the indicated favorites position. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
Creating Playlists
using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system
To create a playlist using tracks Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set
stored in MEM: on the portable audio device.
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites. USB Port
2. Select the track to be stored in For vehicles with a USB port, the
the playlist. following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
3. Press and hold one of the system.
1 to 6 buttons until the track
can be heard again to store the
. iPod's
track. . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store . USB Drives
additional tracks in the playlist. . Zune's
The auxiliary input is located in the Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,
center console. and Zune's are compatible with the
infotainment system.

Connecting and Controlling To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track.
an iPod™ 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Off: Playback starts from the
Not all iPod's can be controlled by 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after
the Infotainment System. the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Connecting an iPod Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
4. Select the track. or Zune™
Shuffle Connecting a PFD or Zune
Tracks can be searched for by:
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set Connect the PFD or Zune to the
. Playlists USB port.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or
. Artists
Off, then press the 0 BACK button Searching For a Track
. Albums to return the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by:
. Song Titles On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists
. Podcasts folder in random order.
. Artists
. Genres Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
. Albums
. Audiobooks . Song Titles
Repeat
. Composers . Podcasts
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press the . Genres
0 BACK button to return the main
screen.

To search for tracks: Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB Drive . Playlists*
2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only . Artists
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, a USB drive.
. Albums
Song Titles, Podcasts, . Song Titles
or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device. . Genres
When a device is not supported, the . Folder View
Shuffle Functionality message “No supported data found.
*This only displays if a playlist is
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set You can safely disconnect the
found on the device.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On device” appears.
or Off. To search for tracks:
Connecting a USB Drive
On: Plays current tracks in random 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Connect the USB drive to the
order. USB port. 2. Select Search.
Off: Plays current tracks in 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
sequential order. Song Titles, Genres,
It is normal for the search feature to or Folder View.
Repeat Functionality take some time to display the
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set information after reading the disc 4. Select the track.
Repeat to On or Off. due to the amount of information
stored on the disc.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track. Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
Unknown.
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.

Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Press the MENU/SEL knob and set with CD/DVD/MEM) Playback of an audio device that is
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
or Off. The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled
devices to be connected using the
On: Plays current tracks in random using the controls on the device.
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
order. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Off: Plays current tracks in Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
sequential order. using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system
Repeat Functionality Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set on the portable audio device.
Repeat to On or Off. USB Port
Repeat On: Repeats the current The following devices may be
track. connected to the USB port and
Repeat Off: Playback starts from controlled by the infotainment
the beginning of the current track system.
after the last track finishes. . iPod's
. USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
The auxiliary input is located in the
center console.

Connecting and Controlling Searching For a Track Connecting and Controlling a

an iPod™ Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive
Not all iPod's can be controlled by . Playlists Files that are not stored in folders
the Infotainment System. are displayed in the root
. Artists directory (USB).
Connecting an iPod . Albums
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Connecting a USB Drive
. Song Titles
Connect the USB drive to the
Selecting a Track . Genres USB port.
Using the control buttons: . Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from
select the previous or next track. the USB port before disconnecting
The number of objects in each
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive:
select the track in the current after the category. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
sub menu. The track will start
To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject.
to play.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing Tracks in Random Order
2. Select Search. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs to On or Off. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in Composers, or Audiobooks.
random order.
4. Select the track. The search rate
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in increases if the MENU/SEL knob
sequential order. is continuously turned while
searching in a list.

Selecting a Track Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat

Using the control buttons: . Playlists
Infotainment
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to Artists
. .
select the previous or next track. . Albums Rear Seat Entertainment

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to . Song Titles (RSE) System
select a track in the current sub The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
menu. The track will start to play.
. Genres
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
Selecting a track in a different The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the
folder: category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The
after the category.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. DVD player is part of the front radio.
To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio
2. Select Folder List. with a DVD player, two rear seat
3. Select the folder. video display screens, audio/video
2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones,
4. Select the track. and a remote control. See CD/DVD
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Searching for Tracks Albums, Song Titles, Genres, Player on page 6‑21 or the
Composers, or Audiobooks. separate navigation system manual
It is normal for the search feature for more information on the vehicle's
to take some time to display the 4. Select the track. The search rate DVD system.
information after reading the device increases if the MENU/SEL knob
due to the amount of information is continuously turned while
stored. searching in a list.
Files that do not have any meta Recording Tracks to MEM
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown. See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on

Before Driving On some infotainment systems, the Headphones

Global Off feature can be turned off
The RSE is for rear seat RSE includes two 2-channel
by performing one of the following:
passengers only. The driver cannot wireless headphones. Channel 1 is
safely view the video screen while . Press and hold the radio power dedicated to the DVD player, and
driving. button for more than Channel 2 is dedicated to any
three seconds. external auxiliary device connected
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not . Insert or eject any disc. to the A/V jacks. The headphones
work until the temperature is within are used to listen to various
. Insert a DVD video disc. multi‐media. The wireless
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
. Press the Remote Control power headphones have an On/Off button,
and below 60°C (140°F). If the button. channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
temperature is outside of this range, control. Turn the headphones off
. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button when not in use.
heat or cool the vehicle until it is or the k button when a DVD
within the operating range. Push the On/Off button to turn on
video disc is in the player.
the headphones. A light on the
Global Off . Press the SRC button on the headphones comes on. If the light
Depending on the infotainment steering wheel when a DVD does not come on, check the
system, the RSE system may video disc is in the player. batteries. Intermittent sound or static
have a Global Off feature. The . Cycle the ignition. can also indicate weak batteries.
Global Off feature disables all RSE See “Battery Replacement” later in
system features. Press and hold this section for more information.
the radio power button for more
than three seconds for Global Off
to disable the RSE features.

Infrared transmitters are on the top Notice: Do not store the Remove the batteries if the
of the left seatback video screen. headphones in heat or direct headphones are not going to be
The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the used for a long period of time.
automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not
power if the RSE system is shut be covered by the warranty. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
off or if the headphones are out of Storage in extreme cold can If available, the A/V jacks are
range of the transmitters for more weaken the batteries. Keep the located on the rear of the floor
than three minutes. Moving too far headphones stored in a cool, dry console. They allow audio or video
forward or stepping out of the place. cables to be connected from an
vehicle, can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads become worn auxiliary device such as a
to lose the signal or have static. or damaged, they can be replaced camcorder or a video game system.
The headphones may automatically separately from the headphones. The A/V jacks are color coded:
turn off after four hours of See your dealer for more . Yellow for video input.
continuous use. information.
. White for left audio input.
To adjust the volume on the Battery Replacement
headphones, use the volume . Red for right audio input.
control. To change the batteries:
Power for auxiliary devices is not
For best audio performance, the 1. Loosen the screw to the battery supplied by the radio system.
headphones must be worn correctly, door located on the left side of
the headphones. To use the auxiliary inputs of the
with the headband over the top of RSE system:
the head. L (Left) and R (Right) 2. Slide the battery door open.
are above the ear pads and are 1. Connect the auxiliary device
3. Replace the two AAA batteries. cables to the A/V jacks.
indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed 4. Replace the battery door and 2. Power on both the auxiliary
on the head. tighten the screw. device and the RSE video
screen.

Changing the Source on the Video 4. Press the AUX button a fourth Audio Output
Display Screens time to change the source of
Audio from the DVD player or
The image from the auxiliary device both video screens to the DVD
auxiliary inputs can be heard
can be switched between the video player.
through the following:
display screens. How to Change the RSE Video . Wireless Headphones
To change the display: Screen Settings
. Vehicle Speakers
1. Press the AUX button on the The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can be The RSE system transmits the
remote control to change the
changed from the setup menu using audio signal to the wireless
source of both video screens
the remote control. To change a headphones if an audio signal is
from the DVD player to the
setting: available. See “Headphones” earlier
auxiliary device.
in this section for more information.
2. Press the AUX button a second 1. Press z.
The front seat passengers are able
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player 2. Use n, q, p, o and r to to listen to playback from the A/V
select the settings. jacks through the vehicle speakers
and the right video screen to the
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
auxiliary device. 3. Press z again to exit the on the radio.
3. Press the AUX button a third setup menu.
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.

Video Screens Push the video screen down into its Video Screen Input Jack
locked position when it is not in use,
The video screens are located in the Each video screen is equipped with
the screen turns off automatically.
back of the driver and front a video input jack to allow video
passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console cables to be connected from an
contains the infrared transmitters for auxiliary device such as a
the wireless headphones, they may camcorder or a video game system.
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs. This signal will override any video
These LEDs are not on the right provided by the RSE system; either
video screen. Both seatback the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
consoles contain an infrared source. The RSE system must be
receiver for the remote control. on for this input to operate.
They are located at the top of each
console. Remote Control
Notice: Avoid directly touching To use the remote control, aim it at
the video screen, as damage may the transmitter window at either
occur. See “Cleaning the Video seatback console and press the
Screen” later in this section for button. Direct sunlight or very bright
To use the video screen: more information. light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
1. Push the release button located from the remote control. Check the
on the seatback console. batteries if the remote control does
2. Move the screen to the desired not seem to be working. See
viewing position. “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.

If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the v (Title): Press to return to the c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
Radio DVD slot, the remote control main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
O button can be used to turn on the function could vary for each disc. Press twice to return to the
video screen display and start the beginning of the DVD.
disc. The infotainment system can y (Main Menu): Press to access
also turn on the video screen the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start
display. See CD/DVD Player on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press to pause a
page 6‑21 or the separate navigation arrows to move the DVD while it is playing. Press again
navigation system manual for cursor. After making a selection to continue playing.
more information. press the enter button. This button Depending on the infotainment
only operates when using a DVD. system in the vehicle, DVD
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation playback may be slowed down by
sunlight can damage it, and the Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to pressing s then [. Reverse slow
navigate through a menu.
repairs will not be covered by the play by pressing s then r. Press
warranty. Storage in extreme cold r (Enter): Press to select the s again to cancel slow play.
can weaken the batteries. Keep highlighted choice in any menu.
the remote control stored in a t (Previous Track/Chapter):
cool, dry place.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust Press to go to the start of the
the brightness, screen display current track or chapter. Press again
Remote Control Buttons mode, and display the to go to the previous track or
language menu. chapter. This button may not work
O (Power): Press to turn the
video screens on and off. q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the
current active menu and return to copyright information or the
P (Illumination): Press to turn the
the previous menu. This button previews.
remote control backlight on. The
operates only when the display
backlight times out after several
menu or a DVD menu is active.
seconds if no other button is
pressed.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to e (Audio): Press to change audio } 10 (Double Digit Entries)
go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this (If Available): Press this button to
chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. select chapter or track numbers
not work when the DVD is playing { (Subtitles): Press to turn greater than 9. Press this button
the copyright information or the ON/OFF subtitles and to move before inputting the number.
previews. through subtitle options when a 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
r (Fast Reverse): Press to DVD is playing. The numbered keypad provides the
quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch capability of direct chapter or track
stop fast reversing a DVD video, the video display between the DVD number selection.
press s. To stop fast reversing a player and an auxiliary source. Replacing the Remote Control
DVD audio or CD, release r. This d (Camera): Press to change the If the remote control becomes lost
button might not work when the camera angle on DVDs that have or damaged, a new universal
DVD is playing the copyright this feature when the DVD is remote control can be purchased.
information or the previews. playing. Use a Toshiba® code set for
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast \ (Clear) (If Available): Press this replacement universal remote
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast button within three seconds after controls.
forwarding a DVD video, press s. inputting a numeric selection, to
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio clear all numeric inputs.
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action
batteries:
No power. The ignition might not be turned to
1. Slide back the rear cover on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
remote control.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in
2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the
compartment. and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote
3. Replace the battery cover. looks stretched out. control.
Remove the batteries from the In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
remote control if unused for an or scrolls. connections at both devices.
extended period of time.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed one
Play but sometimes the DVD starts time, the DVD player resumes
where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was
beginning. stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen is has. The video screen may display
there is no picture or sound. in the auxiliary source mode by one of the following:
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control. Disc Load/Eject Error or
Check the auxiliary input Mechanical Error: There are disc
connections at both devices. load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Disc Format Error or Unknown
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and Format: The disc is inserted with
interference from cellular telephone the disc label wrong side up, or if
towers or by using a cellular the disc is damaged.
telephone in the vehicle. Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
Check that the headphones are on The disc is not from a correct
correctly using the L (left) and R region.
(right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are No Disc Inserted: No disc is
positioned properly with the present when the Z EJECT or
headband across the top of MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
the head. on the radio.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer for assistance.
headphones.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.

DVD Distortion Phone Steering Wheel Controls

Video distortion can occur when b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
operating cellular phones, scanners, Bluetooth (Overview) answer incoming calls, to confirm
CB radios, Global Position Systems system information, and to start
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, Vehicles with a Bluetooth system voice recognition.
or walkie talkies. can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
It might be necessary to turn off the make and receive phone calls. The end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
DVD player when operating one of infotainment system and voice an operation.
these devices in or near the vehicle. recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls
*Excludes the OnStar® System. system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or For information about how to
Cleaning the RSE Seatback ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of navigate the menu system using the
Console the Bluetooth system can be up to infotainment controls, see Operation
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support on page 6‑7.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE all functions and not all phones work 5 (Phone): Press to enter the
seatback console surface. with the Bluetooth system. See Phone main menu.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
Cleaning the Video Screen information about compatible Voice Recognition
phones. The voice recognition system uses
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when Bluetooth Controls commands to control the system
touching or cleaning the screen as and dial phone numbers.
damage could result. Use the buttons located on the
Noise: The system may not
infotainment system and the
recognize voice commands if there
steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth system.

When to Speak: A tone sounds to Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information:

indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
and then speak. For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a when the vehicle is moving.
calm and natural voice. infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7. . The Bluetooth system links with
Audio System the first available paired cell
Pairing
When using the Bluetooth system, phone in the order the phone
sound comes through the vehicle's A Bluetooth enabled cell phone was paired.
front audio system speakers and must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
. Only one paired cell phone can
overrides the audio system. Use the be connected to the Bluetooth
the vehicle before it can be used.
VOL/ O knob during a call to See the cell phone manufacturer system at a time.
change the volume level. The user guide for Bluetooth functions . Pairing should only need to be
adjusted volume level remains in before pairing the cell phone. If a completed once, unless changes
memory for later calls. The system Bluetooth phone is not connected, to the pairing information have
maintains a minimum volume level. calls will be made using OnStar® been made or the phone is
Other Information Hands‐Free Calling, if available. deleted.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide To link to a different paired phone,
The Bluetooth® word mark and for more information.
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® see “Linking to a Different Phone”
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks The pairing process can be started later in this section.
by General Motors is under license. by using the voice recognition
Other trademarks and trade names system or the controls on the
are those of their respective owners. infotainment system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for FCC information.

Pairing a Phone Locate the device named Deleting a Paired Phone

1. Press the CONFIG button. “General Motors” in the list on 1. Press the CONFIG button.
the cell phone and follow the
2. Select Phone Settings. instructions on the cell phone to 2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth. enter the four digit PIN number 3. Select Bluetooth.
provided by the system.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone). 4. Select Device List.
A four digit PIN number appears 6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the 5. Select the phone to delete and
on the display. follow the on screen prompts.
name provided. This name is
If the “Add new GPS device” used to indicate which phone is
option is selected, the system Linking to a Different Phone
connected.
will start a search for Bluetooth To link to a different phone, the new
“Handsfree” profile devices just 7. The system responds with phone must be in the vehicle and
like if “Add new Phone” was “<Phone name> has been available to be connected to the
selected . The additional GPS successfully paired” after the bluetooth system before the process
location feature which would pairing process is complete. is started.
provide the vehicle's GPS 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair 1. Press the CONFIG button.
location through the Bluetooth additional phones.
Serial Port Profile is not 2. Select Phone Settings.
available. Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones 3. Select Bluetooth.
5. Start the pairing process on the 4. Select Device List.
cell phone that will be paired to 1. Press the CONFIG button.
the vehicle. Reference the cell 2. Select Phone Settings. 5. Select the new phone to link to
phone manufacturers user guide and follow the on screen
for information on this process. 3. Select Bluetooth. prompts.
4. Select Device List. If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
deleted.

Making a Call Accepting or Declining a Call Declining a Call

Radio with CD When a call is received, the Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
infotainment system mutes and a Decline and press the MENU/
1. Press the 5 / 0 button. ring tone is heard in the vehicle. SEL knob.
2. Enter the character sequence. Accepting a Call Switching Between Calls (Call
See “Entering a Character Waiting Calls Only)
Sequence” in Operation on Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
page 6‑7 for more information. Answer and press the MENU/ To switch between calls:
SEL knob. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number. Declining a Call 2. Select Switch Call from
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to the menu.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
Decline and press the MENU/ Conference Calling
1. Press the 5 / 0 button. SEL knob.
Conference calling and three way
2. Select Enter number. Call Waiting calling must be supported on the
3. Enter the character sequence. Call waiting must be supported on bluetooth phone and enabled by the
See “Entering a Character the bluetooth phone and enabled by wireless service carrier to work.
Sequence” in Operation on the wireless service carrier to work. To start a conference while in a
page 6‑7 for more information. current call:
Accepting a Call
4. Select Call to start dialing the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
number. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Answer and press the MENU/ 2. Select Enter Number.
SEL knob.

3. Enter the character sequence Muting a Call Bluetooth (Voice

then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in To Mute a Call Recognition)
Operation on page 6‑7 for Press the MENU/SEL knob and Pairing
more information. select Mute Call.
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
4. After the call has been placed, To Cancel Mute paired to the Bluetooth system and
press the MENU/SEL knob and then connected to the vehicle before
choose Merge Calls. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Mute Call. it can be used. See the cell phone
5. To add more callers to the manufacturers user guide for
conference call, repeat Steps 1 Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Bluetooth functions before pairing
through 4. The amount of callers (DTMF) Tones the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
that can be added are limited by is not connected, calls will be made
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
your wireless service carrier. using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
send numbers during a call. This is
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Ending a Call used when calling a menu driven
owner's guide for more information.
phone system.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and The pairing process can be started
select Hang Up. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
by using the voice recognition
select Enter Number.
system or the controls on the
2. Enter the character sequence, infotainment system.
see “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Operation on

Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone 4. Start the pairing process on the

cell phone that will be paired to
. Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press b / g. the vehicle. Reference the cell
. For vehicles without a phone manufacturers user guide
. The pairing process is disabled navigation system, the for information on this process.
when the vehicle is moving. system responds “Ready”, Locate the device named
. The Bluetooth system links with followed by a tone. “General Motors” in the list on
the first available paired cell . For vehicles with a the cell phone and follow the
phone in the order the phone navigation system, the instructions on the cell phone to
was paired. system responds with a enter the four‐digit PIN number
. Only one paired cell phone can tone. After the tone say that was provided in Step 3.
be connected to the Bluetooth “Hands Free”. The system 5. The system prompts for a name
system at a time. responds “Ready”, followed for the phone. This name will be
by a tone. used to indicate which phone is
. Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system connected. The system confirms
pairing information changes or responds “Bluetooth ready”, the name.
the phone is deleted. followed by a tone. 6. The system responds with
To link to a different paired phone, 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds “<Phone name> has been
see Linking to a Different Phone with instructions and a four‐digit successfully paired” after the
later in this section. PIN number. The PIN number pairing process is complete.
will be used in Step 4. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.

Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Say the name of the phone to be
Phones deleted. If the phone name is
1. Press b / g. unknown, use the “List”
1. Press b / g. . For vehicles without a command for a list of all paired
. For vehicles without a navigation system, the phones. The system responds
navigation system, the system responds “Ready”, “Would you like to delete <phone
system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. name>? Yes or No”, followed by
followed by a tone. a tone.
. For vehicles with a
. For vehicles with a navigation system, the 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
navigation system, the system responds with a The system responds “OK,
system responds with a tone. After the tone say deleting <phone name>”.
tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system Linking to a Different Phone
“Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed
responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 1. Press b / g.
by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system . For vehicles without a
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds “Bluetooth ready”, navigation system, the
responds “Bluetooth ready”, followed by a tone. system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all which phone to delete followed . For vehicles with a
the paired Bluetooth devices. by a tone. navigation system, the
The system will respond “is system responds with a
connected” if a phone is tone. After the tone say
connected to the vehicle. “Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number
responds “Bluetooth ready”, The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no
followed by a tone. number to be stored without pauses.
3. Say “Change phone”. The entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes
system responds “Please wait the number, the response is
while I search for other phones”. 1. Press b / g. “OK, Storing”.
. For vehicles without a
. If another phone is found, . If the system does not
the response will be navigation system, the recognize the phone
“<Phone name> is now system responds “Ready”, number, the response is
connected”. followed by a tone. “Store <Phone number>”.
. If another phone is not
. For vehicles with a “Please say yes or no”.
found, the original phone navigation system, the If the number is correct, say
remains connected. system responds with a “Yes”. If the number is not
tone. After the tone say correct, say “No”. The
Storing Name Tags “Hands Free”. The system system will ask for the
responds “Ready”, followed number again.
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that by a tone. 4. After the system stores the
are shared between the Bluetooth 2. Say “Store”. The system phone number, it responds
and OnStar systems. responds “Store, number “Please say the name tag”,
please”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
. Store
. Digit Store
. Directory

5. Say a name tag for the phone

. For vehicles with a 4. After the complete number has
number. The name tag is navigation system, the been entered, say “Store”. The
recorded and the system system responds with a system responds “Please say
responds “About to store tone. After the tone say the name tag”, followed by
<name tag>. Does that “Hands Free”. The system a tone.
sound OK?”. responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone
. If the name tag does not number. The name tag is
sound correct, say “No” 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system recorded and the system
and repeat Step 5. responds with “Please say the responds “About to store <name
first digit to store”, followed by tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
. If the name tag sounds a tone.
correct, say “Yes” and the . If the name tag does not
name tag is stored. After 3. Say the first digit to be stored. sound correct, say “No” and
the number is stored the The system will repeat back the repeat Step 5.
system returns to the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
. If the name tag sounds
main menu. correct, say “Yes” and the
number to be stored is complete.
Using the Digit Store Command name tag is stored. After
. If an unwanted number is the number is stored the
The digit store command allows a recognized by the system, system returns to the
phone number to be stored by say “Clear” at any time to main menu.
entering the digits individually. clear the last number.
1. Press b / g. . To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.

Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete”. The system
The directory command lists all of responds “Delete, please say
The system uses the following
the name tags stored by the system. the name tag”, followed by
commands to delete name tags:
To use the directory command: a tone.
. Delete
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
1. Press b / g. . Delete all name tags The system responds “Would
. For vehicles without a you like to delete, <name tag>?
Using the Delete Command
navigation system, the Please say yes or no”.
system responds “Ready”, The delete command is used to . If the name tag is correct,
followed by a tone. delete specific name tags.
say “Yes” to delete the
. For vehicles with a To delete name tags: name tag. The system
navigation system, the responds with “OK, deleting
system responds with a
1. Press b / g. <name tag>, returning to
tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a the main menu.”
“Hands Free”. The system navigation system, the . If the name tag is incorrect,
responds “Ready”, followed system responds “Ready”, say “No”. The system
by a tone. followed by a tone. responds with “No. OK, let's
2. Say “Directory”. The system . For vehicles with a try again, please say the
responds “Directory” and lists all navigation system, the name tag.”
stored name tags. The system system responds with a
returns to the main menu when tone. After the tone say
the list is complete. “Hands Free”. The system
by a tone.

Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The Using the Dial Command
Command system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in 1. Press b / g.
The Delete All Name Tags
command deletes all stored phone your phone directory and your . For vehicles without a
book name tags and route name route destination directory. Are navigation system, the
tags for OnStar, if stored. you sure you want to do this? system responds “Ready”,
Please say yes or no.” followed by a tone.
To delete all name tags: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a
1. Press b / g. name tags. navigation system, the
. For vehicles without a . Say “No” to cancel the system responds with a
navigation system, the function and return to the tone. After the tone say
system responds “Ready”, main menu. “Hands Free”. The system
followed by a tone. responds “Ready”, followed
Making a Call by a tone.
Calls can be made using the 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
following commands: “Dial using <phone name>.
tone. After the tone say . Dial “Number please”, followed by
“Hands Free”. The system a tone.
. Digit Dial
. Call
by a tone.
. Re‐dial

3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
pausing. a time. The system repeats back
1. Press b / g. the digit it heard followed by
. If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
. For vehicles without a a tone.
with “OK, Dialing” and dials navigation system, the 4. Continue entering digits until the
the number. system responds “Ready”, number to be dialed is complete.
followed by a tone. After the whole number has
. If the system does not
recognize the number, it
. For vehicles with a been entered, say “Dial”. The
confirms the numbers navigation system, the system responds “OK, Dialing”
followed by a tone. If the system responds with a and dials the number.
number is correct, say tone. After the tone say . If an unwanted number is
“Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system recognized by the system,
“OK, Dialing” and dials the responds “Ready”, followed say “Clear” at any time to
number. If the number is by a tone. clear the last number.
not correct, say “No”. The 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . To hear all of the numbers
system will ask for the responds “Digit dial using recognized by the system,
number again. <phone name>, please say the say “Verify” at any time.
first digit to dial”, followed by
a tone.

Using the Call Command 3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command
to call.
1. Press b / g. 1. Press b / g.
. If the system recognizes
. For vehicles without a the name tag it responds
navigation system, the “OK, calling, <name tag>” navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”, and dials the number. system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
. If the system does not
. For vehicles with a recognize the name tag, it
navigation system, the confirms the name tag navigation system, the
system responds with a followed by a tone. If the system responds with a
tone. After the tone say name tag is correct, say tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed with “OK, calling, <name responds with “Ready”,
by a tone. tag>” and dials the number. followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds If the name tag is not 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
“Call using <phone name>. correct, say “No”. The system responds “Re‐dial using
Please say the name tag”, system will ask for the <phone name>” and dials the
followed by a tone. name tag again. last number called from the
Once connected, the person called connected Bluetooth phone.
will be heard through the audio Once connected, the person called
speakers. will be heard through the audio
speakers.

Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call

When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the
tone is heard in the vehicle. and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call
carrier. cannot hear them.
. Press b g to answer the call.
1. While on a call, press b g. The To Mute a call
. Press c / $ to ignore a call. system responds with “Ready”,
1. Press b g. The system
Call Waiting followed by a tone.
responds “Ready”, followed by
Call waiting must be supported on 2. Say “Three‐way call”. a tone.
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
the wireless service carrier. responds “Call muted”.
dial or call”.
. Press b g to answer an 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute
incoming call when another call dial the number of the third party
is active. The original call is 1. Press b g. The system
to be called. responds “Ready”, followed by
placed on hold.
4. Once the call is connected, a tone.
. Press b g again to return to the press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
original call. together. The system responds
. To ignore the incoming call, no “Resuming call”.
action is required.
Ending a Call
. Press c / $ to disconnect the Press c / $ to end a call.
current call and switch to the call
on hold.

Transferring a Call For vehicles without a navigation To access contacts stored in the cell
system, press b g during a call phone:
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and with the audio on the cell phone, 1. Press b / g.
the cell phone. the audio transfers to the vehicle.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell For vehicles with a navigation navigation system, the
Phone system, press b g during a call system responds “Ready”,
with the audio on the cell phone. followed by a tone.
During a call with the audio in the
If the audio does not transfer to the
vehicle: . For vehicles with a
vehicle, use the audio transfer
1. Press b g. The system feature on the cell phone. See the
responds “Ready”, followed by cell phone manufacturers user guide
for more information. tone. After the tone say
a tone. “Hands Free”. The system
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system Voice Pass-Thru responds “Ready”, followed
responds “Transferring call” and by a tone.
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
the audio transfers to the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
voice recognition commands on the
phone. responds “Bluetooth ready”,
cell phone. See the cell phone
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle manufacturers user guide to see if followed by a tone.
Bluetooth System the cell phone supports this feature. 3. Say “Voice”. The system
The cell phone must be paired responds “OK, accessing
and connected with the Bluetooth <phone name>”.
system before a call can be . The cell phone's normal
transferred. The connection process prompt messages will go
can take up to two minutes after the through its cycle according
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or to the phone's operating
ACC/ACCESSORY. instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

. If the system does not . If the system does not
(DTMF) Tones recognize the number, it recognize the name tag, it
responds “Dial Number, responds “Dial <name tag>,
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can please say yes or no?”, please say yes or no?”,
send numbers and the numbers followed by a tone. If the followed by a tone. If the
stored as name tags during a call. number is correct, say name tag is correct, say
Use this feature when calling a “Yes”. The system responds “Yes”. The system responds
menu driven phone system. Account “OK, Sending Number” and with “OK, Sending <name
numbers can also be stored for use. the dial tones are sent and tag>” and the dial tones are
Sending a Number During a Call the call continues. sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag Clearing the System
1. Press b g. The system
During a Call
responds “Ready”, followed by Unless information is deleted out of
a tone. 1. Press b g. The system the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
responds “Ready”, followed by will be retained indefinitely. This
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
a tone. includes all saved name tags in the
“Say a number to send tones”,
phone book and phone pairing
followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The information. For information on how
3. Say the number to send. system responds “Say a name to delete this information, see the
tag to send tones”, followed by previous sections on Deleting a
. If the system recognizes a tone.
the number, it responds Paired Phone and Deleting
“OK, Sending Number” and 3. Say the name tag to send. Name Tags.
the dial tones are sent and . If the system recognizes
the call continues. the number, it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.

Bluetooth (Navigation) The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone

by using the voice recognition 1. Press the CONFIG hard key
For information about how to system or the controls on the
navigate the menu system using repeatedly until the Phone menu
infotainment system. is shown or touch the Phone tab
the infotainment controls, see
“Overview” under Introduction, Pairing Information: on the screen.
in the Navigation supplement. . Up to five cell phones can be
Bluetooth Pairing
. The pairing process is disabled
To make calls with a Bluetooth cell when the vehicle is moving.
phone through your vehicle, it must
be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth . The Bluetooth system links with
system first and then connected to the first available paired cell
the vehicle before it can be used. phone based on the order
Refer to the cell phone shown in the device list.
manufacturer's user guide for . Only one paired cell phone can
Bluetooth pairing instructions. If a be connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth phone is off or not Bluetooth system at a time.
connected, calls will automatically
be made using the OnStar®
. Pairing should only need to be 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Hands‐Free Calling feature, completed once, unless changes
if available. Refer to the OnStar to the pairing information have
owner's guide for more information been made or the phone is
about OnStar Hands-Free Calling. deleted.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3 To link to a different paired phone,
capability cannot be connected to see “Linking to a Different Phone”
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3 later in this section.
player at the same time.

location through the Bluetooth system voice prompt then

Serial Port Profile is not repeats the name you provided
available. for confirmation, say “Yes”.
5. The system responds with
“phone name has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
3. Select “Add New Phone”, the is shown or touch the Phone tab
pairing process will begin displayed on the screen.
searching for Bluetooth devices
on your cellular phone. See the
cell phone manufacturer's user On the cell phone, locate the
guide for information on this device named “General Motors”.
process. Follow the instructions given on
If the “Add new GPS device” the cell phone or follow the voice
option is selected, the system prompts, to enter the four digit
will start a search for Bluetooth PIN number that has been
“Handsfree” profile devices just provided.
like if you had selected “Add 4. The system voice prompt
new Phone”. The additional GPS requests that you say the name
location feature which would you want used for the phone that
provide the vehicle's GPS is being paired. Use a name that
best describes the phone. The 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

Deleting a Paired Phone

is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phones
will be displayed. If there is a
currently connected phone, a check
mark will appear on the right side of
the Phone name.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deleted 5. Once a phone has been deleted,
and then follow the on screen the only way to connect back to
prompts to delete the device that phone is to pair the phone
from the system. again. See “Bluetooth Pairing”
earlier before the process is
started.

Linking to a Different Phone

In order to link to a different phone,
the new phone must be in the
vehicle and available to be
connected to the Bluetooth system
before the process is started.
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be linked

and then follow the on screen
prompts.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

Making a Call
Press 5 located on the faceplate of
the infotainment system, to access
the phone menu.
5. The Phone menu will be 2. Enter the desired number by

displayed with the name of the touching the appropriate buttons
phone linked. on the screen or using the
rotary knob.
3. Press the CALL button to make
Enter Number the call.
Use this option to enter a phone Accepting or Declining an
number and make a call. To do this: Incoming Call
1. Press the Enter Number When an incoming call is received,
selection. A dial pad displays on the infotainment system mutes any
the Navigation screen. audio being played and sounds a
ring tone.

Accepting a Call Call Waiting Conference Calling

Press b g on the steering wheel Call waiting must be supported on Conference and three-way calling
control to answer the incoming call the Bluetooth phone and enabled by must be supported on the Bluetooth
or touch the Answer option to the wireless service carrier to work. phone and enabled by the wireless
answer the call. service carrier to work.
Switching Calls (Only Available
with Call Waiting) To start a conference while in a
current call:
This feature allows you to switch
between calls, making one call 1. Press the 5 hard key on the
active and placing the other on hold. faceplate until the Phone main
screen is shown with the current
active call.
Declining a Call
Press c / $ on the steering wheel
controls or select the Decline option
to decline the call.
Switch Call: Turn or press the
menu select knob to “Switch Call”
and press Enter or touch the
2. Select the “Enter Number”
“Switch Call” option.
option.

Ending a Call Mute or UnMute a Call

1. Press the 5 hard key.
2. Select the Mute call option to
mute the call.
3. Select the Mute call option again
to unmute the call.
3. Make another call. The first call

will be placed on hold while the
second call is dialing and 1. Press the 5 hard key.
connected.
2. Select Hang Up.
4. To make a conference call,
select the “Merge Calls” option
which will merge both calls into
one conference call.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 2
through 4. The amount of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call, this is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
1. Press the 5 hard key. 2. Select “Enter Number” option

and enter the number sequence.
The DTMF Tones will be generated
on the network as you enter each
number.

Climate Controls 7-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
Climate Control Systems with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
A. Fan Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase

B. Air Delivery Mode Control or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob completely to T to turn the
C. Temperature Control fan off.
D. Outside Air Temperature Control: Turn to
E. Defrost increase or decrease the
F. Rear Window Defogger temperature.
G. Recirculation
H. Air Conditioning

7-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: To Air Conditioning Rear Window Defogger

change the current mode, select
one of the following:
# (Air Conditioning): Press to < (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
turn the air conditioning on or off. the rear window defogger on or off.
F (Vent): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside The rear window defogger turns off
instrument panel outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the after about 10 minutes. It can also
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the air conditioning will not work. be turned off by turning the ignition
instrument panel outlets and the h (Recirculation): Press to turn to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
floor outlets. on the recirculation. An indicator OFF. If turned on again, it runs for
light comes on. Air is recirculated about five minutes before
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the turning off.
floor outlets. inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or Do not drive the vehicle until all the
W (Defog): Clears the windows of prevent outside air and odors from windows are clear.
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the entering.
windshield and floor outlets. Notice: Do not use a razor blade
% (Outside Air): Press to turn or sharp object to clear the inside
0 (Defrost): Clears the on the outside air. An indicator light rear window. Do not adhere
windshield of fog or frost more comes on. Outside air is circulated anything to the defogger grid
quickly. Air is directed to the throughout the vehicle. lines in the rear glass. These
windshield and side window outlets. actions may damage the rear
For best results, clear all snow and defogger. Repairs would not be
ice from the windshield before covered by your warranty.
defrosting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.

Automatic Climate Control System

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
with this system.
Without Heated Seats
A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control

B. AUTO G. Power
C. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Air Conditioning
D. Defrost I. Rear Window Defogger
E. Recirculation J. Outside Air

To place the system in

automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
needed.
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
With Heated Seats 9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
A. Fan Control Automatic Operation Adjusting the fan speed while in
B. AUTO The system automatically controls automatic mode places the fan
the fan speed, air delivery, air under manual control. The AUTO
C. Air Delivery Mode Control indicator light turns off. The air
conditioning and recirculation to
D. Defrost heat or cool the vehicle to the delivery mode remains in automatic
selected temperature. control.
E. Recirculation
When the AUTO indicator light is Temperature Control: Turn to
F. Temperature Control
on, the system is in full automatic increase or decrease the
G. Power operation. temperature inside the vehicle.
H. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
I. Rear Window Defogger
J. Air Conditioning

H / G (Air Delivery Mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the Rear Window Defogger
Control): Press mode up or mode windows are clear.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
down to cycle through the different Air Conditioning the rear window defogger on or off.
air delivery modes. The current The rear window defogger turns off
mode is shown on the display. # (Air Conditioning): Press to after about 10 minutes. It can also
turn the air conditioning on or off. be turned off by turning the ignition
Select from the following: If the fan is turned off or the outside to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
F (Vent): Air is directed to the temperature falls below freezing, the OFF. If turned on again, it runs
instrument panel outlets. air conditioning will not work. When for about five minutes before
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the in AUTO, the air conditioning will turning off.
instrument panel outlets and the come on automatically as needed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
floor outlets. h (Recirculation): Press to turn windows are clear.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the on the recirculation. Press to
alternate between recirculation and Notice: Do not use a razor blade
floor outlets.
outside air, if the vehicle does not or sharp object to clear the inside
W (Defog): Clears the windows of have a separate outside air button. rear window. Do not adhere
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the anything to the defogger grid
windshield and floor outlets. The indicator light turns on when lines in the rear glass. These
recirculation is selected. Air is actions may damage the rear
0 (Defrost): Clears the recirculated inside the vehicle. defogger. Repairs would not be
windshield of fog or frost more It helps quickly cool the air inside
quickly. Air is directed to the covered by your warranty.
the vehicle or prevent outside air
windshield and side window outlets. and odors from entering. L / M (Driver and Passenger
Selecting defrost disables the Heated Seats): For vehicles with
automatic mode. % (Outside Air, If Equipped): heated seats, see Heated Front
Press to turn on the outside air. An Seats on page 2‑7.
For best results, clear all snow and indicator light comes on. Outside air
ice from the windshield before is circulated throughout the vehicle.
defrosting.

Sensors Air Vents Maintenance

The solar sensor, located on top of Use the air outlets, located in the
the instrument panel near the center and on the side of the Passenger Compartment
windshield, monitors the solar heat. instrument panel, to direct the Air Filter
The climate control system uses the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
information to adjust the located near the center air outlets,
other airborne irritants from outside
temperature, fan speed, to open or close off the airflow.
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
recirculation, and air delivery mode.
Operation Tips The filter should be replaced as part
Do not cover the solar sensor or the . Clear away any ice, snow, of routine scheduled maintenance.
system will not work properly.
or leaves from air inlets at the See Scheduled Maintenance on
base of the windshield that could page 10‑2 for replacement
block the flow of air into the intervals. To find out what type of
vehicle. filter to use, see Maintenance
. Keep the path under the front Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.

The passenger compartment air 4. Remove the glove box. 8. Install the new air filter.
filter can be accessed by removing 5. Locate the service door for the 9. Close the service door and
the entire glove box. passenger compartment air filter. latches.
1. Open the glove box completely 6. Push the two tabs upwards and 10. Re‐install the glove box.
and locate the stop tab on top of release the latches holding the
the glove box door. See your dealer if additional
service door. Lift the assistance is needed.
service door.
2. Push the stop tab upwards until

the stop tab is under the 7. Remove the old air filter.
instrument panel assembly and
the glove box is released.
3. Unsnap the tabs beneath the
glove box that connects it to the
bottom of the instrument panel
assembly.

2 NOTES

Driving and Operating 8-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-28
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
8-28 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-38
8-40
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Driving Information Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 8-41
Driving for Better Fuel Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 8-31
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Ride Control Systems
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Traction Control
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Parking Over Things System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Running the Vehicle While Object Detection Systems
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-46
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 8-19 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-35 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 8-20 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-23
Drive Systems Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-54

8-2 Driving and Operating
California Fuel
. Always follow posted speed
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Driving Information limits or drive more slowly when
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-54 conditions require.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Driving for Better Fuel . Keep vehicle tires properly
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56 Economy inflated.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Driving habits can affect fuel . Combine several trips into a
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
mileage. Here are some driving tips single trip.
Towing to get the best fuel economy
possible.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
General Towing the same TPC Spec number
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 . Avoid fast starts and accelerate molded into the tire's sidewall
Driving Characteristics and smoothly. near the size.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
. Brake gradually and avoid . Follow recommended scheduled
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 abrupt stops. maintenance.
Trailer Sway . Avoid idling the engine for long
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 periods of time.
Conversions and Add-Ons . When road and weather
Add-On Electrical conditions are appropriate, use
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 cruise control, if equipped.

Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Police records show that almost

40 percent of all motor
Defensive driving means “always vehicle-related deaths involve
expect the unexpected.” The first { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
step in driving defensively is to wear deaths are the result of someone
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on Drinking and then driving is very
who was drinking and driving.
page 2‑9. dangerous. Your reflexes,
In recent years, more than
perceptions, attentiveness, and
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
{ WARNING judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
Assume that other road users can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or For persons under 21, it is against
drivers) are going to be careless
ride with a driver who has been the law in every U.S. state to drink
and make mistakes. Anticipate alcohol. There are good medical,
what they might do and be ready. drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
psychological, and developmental
In addition: you are with a group, designate a
reasons for these laws.
.
driver who will not drink.
Allow enough following The obvious way to eliminate the
distance between you and Death and injury associated with leading highway safety problem is
the driver in front of you. drinking and driving is a global for people never to drink alcohol
. Focus on the task of driving. tragedy. and then drive.
Driver distraction can cause Alcohol affects four things that
collisions resulting in injury or anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
possible death. These simple judgment, muscular coordination,
defensive driving techniques vision, and attentiveness.
could save your life.

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping

alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the
make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is
especially injuries to the brain, on page 4‑19. pavement or gravel; the condition of
spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry,
that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied.
is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy
been drinking. Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive in
only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather
The following three systems or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This
help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not
driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard
accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, a braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide. vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic
Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That following distances eliminates a lot
vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an of unnecessary braking. That means
page 8‑43. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life.
space between the vehicle and
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
others is important.
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 9‑4.

If the engine ever stops while the steering assist is lost because the Hydraulic Power Steering
vehicle is being driven, brake electric power steering system is not (3.0L V6 Engine)
normally but do not pump the functioning, the vehicle can be
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, steered but it will take more effort. If power steering assist is lost
the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the
If you turn the steering wheel in power steering system is not
down. If the engine stops, there will either direction several times until it
still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be
stops, or hold the steering wheel in steered but it will take more effort.
it will be used when the brake is the stopped position for an
applied. Once the power assist is extended amount of time, you may Steering Tips
used up, it can take longer to stop notice a reduced amount of power
and the brake pedal will be harder It is important to take curves at a
steering assist. The normal amount reasonable speed.
to push. of power steering assist should
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer return shortly after a few normal Traction in a curve depends on the
accessories can affect vehicle steering movements. condition of the tires and the road
performance. See Accessories surface, the angle at which the
The electric power steering system curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
and Modifications on page 9‑4. does not require regular While in a curve, speed is the one
maintenance. If you suspect factor that can be controlled.
Steering steering system problems, such as
abnormally high steering effort for a If there is a need to reduce speed,
Electric Power Steering do it before entering the curve, while
prolonged period of time, contact
(2.4L L4 Engine) your dealer for service repairs. the front wheels are straight.
If the engine stalls while driving, the Try to adjust the speed so you can
power steering assist system will drive through the curve. Maintain a
continue to operate until you are reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
able to stop the vehicle. If power accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
The vehicle can perform very well positions, it can be turned a full
in emergencies like these. First 180 degrees very quickly without
apply the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only
page 8‑4. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there
problem, to the left or right is nothing in the way, steer so that
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.

pavement. Turn the steering wheel Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
one-eighth turn, until the right front material is on the road. For safety,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
tire contacts the pavement edge. slow down and adjust your driving to
most skids by taking reasonable
Then turn the steering wheel to go these conditions. It is important to
care suited to existing conditions,
straight down the roadway. slow down on slippery surfaces
and by not overdriving those
because stopping distance is longer
conditions. But skids are always
Loss of Control possible.
and vehicle control more limited.
Let us review what driving experts While driving on a surface with
The three types of skids correspond
say about what happens when the reduced traction, try your best to
to the vehicle's three control
three control systems — brakes, avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
systems. In the braking skid, the
steering, and acceleration — do not or braking, including reducing
wheels are not rolling. In the
have enough friction where the tires vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much
meet the road to do what the driver gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes
has asked. cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
not realize the surface is slippery
In any emergency, do not give up. And in the acceleration skid, too
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Keep trying to steer and constantly much throttle causes the driving
recognize warning clues — such as
seek an escape route or area of wheels to spin.
enough water, ice, or packed snow
less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored
your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you
and quickly steer the way you want have any doubt.
the vehicle to go. If you start
Remember: Antilock brakes help
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid.
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

Off-Road Driving At the very time you need special Before You Go Off-Roading
alertness and driving skills, your
Vehicles with all‐wheel drive can be . Have all necessary maintenance
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
used for off‐road driving. Vehicles and service work done.
can be affected by even a small
without all‐wheel drive should not be amount of alcohol. You could have a . Make sure there is enough fuel,
driven off-road except on a level, serious — or even fatal — accident that fluid levels are where they
solid surface. if you drink and drive or ride with a should be, and that the spare
Many of the vehicle design features driver who has been drinking. tire is fully inflated.
that help make the vehicle more Off-roading can be great fun but has . Be sure to read all the
responsive on paved roads during some definite hazards. The greatest information about all-wheel-drive
poor weather conditions also help of these is the terrain itself. When vehicles in this manual.
make it better suited for off‐road use off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
than conventional passenger
. Make sure all underbody
marked, curves are not banked, and shields, if the vehicle has them,
vehicles. The vehicle does not have there are no road signs. Surfaces
features usually thought to be are properly attached.
can be slippery, rough, uphill,
necessary for extended or severe or downhill. . Know the local laws that apply to
off‐road use such as special off-roading where you will be
underbody shielding and transfer Avoid sharp turns and abrupt driving or check with law
case low gear range. maneuvers. Failure to operate the enforcement people in the area.
vehicle correctly off‐road could
The airbag system is designed to result in loss of vehicle control or . Be sure to get the necessary
work properly under a wide range of vehicle rollover. permission if you will be on
conditions, including off‐road usage. private land.
Always wear your safety belt and Off-roading involves some new
observe safe driving speeds, skills. That is why it is very
especially on rough terrain. important that you read these
driving tips and suggestions to help
Drinking and driving can be very make off-road driving safer and
dangerous on any road and this is more enjoyable.
certainly true for off-road driving.
Loading Your Vehicle for There are some important things to

Off-Road Driving WARNING (Continued) remember about how to load your
vehicle.
. Heavy loads on the roof raise
{ WARNING the vehicle's center of gravity,
. The heaviest things should be
on the floor, forward of the rear
. Cargo on the load floor piled making it more likely to roll axle. Put heavier items as far
higher than the seatbacks over. You can be seriously or forward as you can.
can be thrown forward during fatally injured if the vehicle
a sudden stop. You or your rolls over. Put heavy loads
. Be sure the load is properly
passengers could be injured. inside the cargo area, not on secured, so things are not
Keep cargo below the top of the roof. Keep cargo in the tossed around.
the seatbacks. cargo area as far forward and You will find other important
. Unsecured cargo on the low as possible. information under Vehicle Load
load floor can be tossed Limits on page 8‑24 and Tires on
about when driving over page 9‑40.
rough terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
(Continued)

Environmental Concerns
. Always carry a litter bag and For vehicles with a winch, be sure to
make sure all refuse is removed read the winch instructions. In a
Off-road driving can provide from any campsite before remote area, a winch can be handy
wholesome and satisfying leaving. if you get stuck but you will want to
recreation. However, it also . Take extreme care with open know how to use it properly.
raises environmental concerns. We
recognize these concerns and urge fires (where permitted), camp Getting Familiar with Off-Road
every off-roader to follow these stoves, and lanterns.
Driving
basic rules for protecting the . Never park your vehicle over dry
environment: grass or other combustible It is a good idea to practice in an
materials that could catch fire area that is safe and close to home
. Always use established trails, before you go into the wilderness.
roads, and areas that have been from the heat of the vehicle's
exhaust system. Off-roading requires some new and
specially set aside for public different skills.
off-road recreational driving and Traveling to Remote Areas
obey all posted regulations. Tune your senses to different kinds
It makes sense to plan your trip, of signals. Your eyes need to
. Avoid any driving practice that especially when going to a remote constantly sweep the terrain for
could damage shrubs, flowers, area. Know the terrain and plan unexpected obstacles. Your ears
trees, or grasses or disturb your route. Get accurate maps of need to listen for unusual tire or
wildlife. This includes trails and terrain. Check to see if engine sounds. Use your arms,
wheel-spinning, breaking there are any blocked or closed hands, feet, and body to respond to
down trees, or unnecessary roads. vibrations and vehicle bounce.
driving through streams or over
soft ground. It is also a good idea to travel with
at least one other vehicle in case
something happens to one of them.

Controlling the vehicle is the key to Surface Conditions: Off-roading

successful off-road driving. One of { WARNING surfaces can be hard-packed dirt,
the best ways to control the vehicle gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
is to control the speed. At higher When you are driving off-road, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces
speeds: bouncing and quick changes in affects the vehicle's steering,
direction can easily throw you out acceleration, and braking in different
. You approach things faster and of position. This could cause you
have less time to react. ways. Depending on the surface,
to lose control and crash. So, slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
. There is less time to scan the whether you are driving on or off delayed acceleration, poor traction,
terrain for obstacles. the road, you and your and longer braking distances can
. The vehicle has more bounce passengers should wear safety occur.
when driving over obstacles. belts. Surface Obstacles: Unseen or
. More braking distance is hidden obstacles can be hazardous.
Scanning the Terrain A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
needed, especially on an
unpaved surface. Off-road driving can take you over startle you if you are not prepared
many different kinds of terrain. Be for them. Often these obstacles are
familiar with the terrain and its many hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
different features. or even the rise and fall of the
terrain itself.

Some things to consider: Off-roading requires a different kind

of alertness from driving on paved WARNING (Continued)
. Is the path ahead clear?
roads and highways. There are no
. Will the surface texture change road signs, posted speed limits, them, you will roll over. You could
abruptly up ahead? or signal lights. Use good judgment be seriously injured or killed.
. Does the travel take you uphill or about what is safe and what is not. If you have any doubt about the
downhill? steepness, do not drive the hill.
Driving on Hills
. Will you have to stop suddenly Off-road driving often takes you up, Approaching a Hill
or change direction quickly? down, or across a hill. Driving safely When you approach a hill, decide if
When driving over obstacles or on hills requires good judgment it is too steep to climb, descend,
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on and an understanding of what the or cross. Steepness can be hard to
the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, vehicle can and cannot do. There judge. On a very small hill, for
or other surface features can jerk are some hills that simply cannot be example, there may be a smooth,
the wheel out of your hands. driven, no matter how well built the constant incline with only a small
vehicle. change in elevation where you can
When driving over bumps, rocks,
or other obstacles, the wheels can easily see all the way to the top.
leave the ground. If this happens, { WARNING On a large hill, the incline may get
even with one or two wheels, you steeper as you near the top, but you
cannot control the vehicle as well or Many hills are simply too steep might not see this because the crest
at all. for any vehicle. If you drive up of the hill is hidden by bushes,
them, you will stall. If you drive grass, or shrubs.
Because you will be on an unpaved down them, you cannot control
surface, it is especially important to your speed. If you drive across
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
turns, or sudden braking. (Continued)

Consider this as you approach a hill: Driving Uphill

. Ease up on the speed as you
approach the top of the hill.
. Is there a constant incline, Once you decide it is safe to drive . Attach a flag to the vehicle to be
or does the hill get sharply up the hill:
steeper in places? more visible to approaching
. Use a low gear and get a firm traffic on trails or hills.
. Is there good traction on the grip on the steering wheel.
hillside, or will the surface cause
. Sound the horn as you approach
. Get a smooth start up the hill the top of the hill to let opposing
tire slipping?
and try to maintain speed. Not traffic know you are there.
. Is there a straight path up or using more power than needed
down the hill so you will not can avoid spinning the wheels or
. Use headlamps even during the
have to make turning sliding. day to make the vehicle more
maneuvers? visible to oncoming traffic.
. Are there obstructions on the hill { WARNING { WARNING
that can block your path, such
as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts? Turning or driving across steep
hills can be dangerous. You could Driving to the top (crest) of a
. What is beyond the hill? Is there lose traction, slide sideways, and hill at full speed can cause an
a cliff, an embankment, a accident. There could be a
possibly roll over. You could be
drop-off, a fence? Get out and drop-off, embankment, cliff,
seriously injured or killed. When
walk the hill if you do not know. or even another vehicle. You
It is the smart way to find out. driving up hills, always try to go
straight up. could be seriously injured or
. Is the hill simply too rough? killed. As you near the top of a
Steep hills often have ruts, . Try to drive straight up the hill if hill, slow down and stay alert.
gullies, troughs, and exposed at all possible. If the path twists
rocks because they are more and turns, you might want to find
susceptible to the effects of another route.
erosion.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about to

. While backing down the hill, put . Never try to turn around if about
stall, and you cannot make it up your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill.
the hill: wheel at the 12 o'clock position If the hill is steep enough to stall
so you can tell if the wheels are the vehicle, it is steep enough
. Push the brake pedal to stop the straight and can maneuver as to cause it to roll over. If you
vehicle and keep it from rolling you back down. It is best to back cannot make it up the hill, back
backwards and apply the down the hill with the wheels straight down the hill.
parking brake. straight rather than in the left or If, after stalling, you try to back
. If the engine is still running, shift right direction. Turning the wheel down the hill and decide you just
the transmission to R (Reverse), too far to the left or right will cannot do it, set the parking brake,
release the parking brake, and increase the possibility of a put your transmission in P (Park),
slowly back down the hill in rollover. and turn off the engine. Leave the
R (Reverse). Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, vehicle and go get some help. Exit
. If the engine has stopped or is about to stall, when going up on the uphill side and stay clear of
running, you need to restart it. a hill: the path the vehicle would take if it
With the brake pedal pressed . Never attempt to prevent a stall rolled downhill.
and the parking brake still by shifting into N (Neutral) to
applied, shift the transmission to rev-up the engine and regain
P (Park) and restart the engine. forward momentum. This will
Then, shift to R (Reverse), not work. The vehicle can roll
release the parking brake, and backward very quickly and could
slowly back down the hill as go out of control.
straight as possible in
R (Reverse).

Driving Downhill Vehicles are much more likely to

When off-roading takes you
{ WARNING stall when going uphill, but if it
happens when going downhill:
downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going down
a hill can cause your brakes to 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
. How steep is the downhill? Will I
overheat and fade. This could regular brakes and apply the
be able to maintain vehicle
cause loss of control and a parking brake.
control?
.
serious accident. Apply the 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still
What is the surface like?
brakes lightly when descending a braking, restart the engine.
Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
hill and use a low gear to keep 3. Shift back to a low gear, release
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
vehicle speed under control. the parking brake, and drive
. Are there hidden surface
straight down.
obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Things not to do when driving down
Boulders? a hill: 4. If the engine will not start, get
out and get help.
. What is at the bottom of the hill? . When driving downhill, avoid
Is there a hidden creek bank or turns that take you across the
even a river bottom with large incline of the hill. A hill that is not
rocks? too steep to drive down might be
If you decide you can go down a hill too steep to drive across. The
safely, try to keep the vehicle vehicle could roll over.
headed straight down. Use a low . Never go downhill with the
gear so engine drag can help the transmission in N (Neutral),
brakes so they do not have to do all called free-wheeling. The brakes
the work. Descend slowly, keeping will have to do all the work and
the vehicle under control at all could overheat and fade.
times.

Driving Across an Incline across an incline, the narrower For these reasons, carefully
track width — the distance consider whether to try to drive
An off-road trail will probably go
between the left and right across an incline. Just because the
across the incline of a hill. To decide
wheels — might not prevent the trail goes across the incline does
whether to try to drive across the
vehicle from tilting and rolling not mean you have to drive it. The
incline, consider the following:
over. Driving across an incline last vehicle to try it might have
puts more weight on the downhill rolled over.
{ WARNING wheels which could cause a If you feel the vehicle starting to
downhill slide or a rollover. slide sideways, turn downhill. This
Driving across an incline that is
too steep will make your vehicle
. Surface conditions can be a should help straighten out the
roll over. You could be seriously problem. Loose gravel, muddy vehicle and prevent the side
injured or killed. If you have any spots, or even wet grass can slipping. The best way to prevent
doubt about the steepness of the cause the tires to slip sideways, this is to “walk the course” first, so
incline, do not drive across it. downhill. If the vehicle slips you know what the surface is like
sideways, it can hit something before driving it.
Find another route instead.
that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
. A hill that can be driven straight etc. — and roll over.
up or down might be too steep to . Hidden obstacles can make the
drive across. When going steepness of the incline even
straight up or down a hill, the worse. If you drive across a rock
length of the wheel base — the with the uphill wheels, or if the
distance from the front wheels to downhill wheels drop into a rut
the rear wheels — reduces the or depression, the vehicle can tilt
likelihood the vehicle will tumble even more.
end over end. But when driving

Stalling on an Incline Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Hard packed snow and ice offer the
or Ice worst tire traction. On these
{ WARNING When you drive in mud, snow,
surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the
or sand, the wheels do not get good traction is so poor that you will have
Getting out on the downhill (low) traction. Acceleration is not as
side of a vehicle stopped across difficulty accelerating. And, if the
quick, turning is more difficult, and vehicle does get moving, poor
an incline is dangerous. If the braking distances are longer.
vehicle rolls over, you could be steering and difficult braking can
crushed or killed. Always get out It is best to use a low gear when in cause it to slide out of control.
on the uphill (high) side of the mud — the deeper the mud, the
vehicle and stay well clear of the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does
{ WARNING
rollover path.
not get stuck. Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
If the vehicle stalls when crossing When driving on sand, wheel or rivers can be dangerous.
an incline, be sure you, and any traction changes. On loosely packed Underwater springs, currents
passengers, get out on the uphill sand, such as on beaches or sand under the ice, or sudden thaws
side, even if the door there is harder dunes, the tires will tend to sink into can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
to open. If you get out on the the sand. This affects steering, could fall through the ice and you
downhill side and the vehicle starts accelerating, and braking. Drive at a and your passengers could
to roll over, you will be right in reduced speed and avoid sharp drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
its path. turns or abrupt maneuvers. surfaces only.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.

Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving
before driving through it. Do not try
Remove any brush or debris that
{ WARNING it if it is deep enough to cover the
wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
Driving through rushing water can pipe — you probably will not get
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage
sweep your vehicle downstream the axle and other vehicle parts. After operation in mud or sand,
and you and your passengers have the brake linings cleaned and
If the water is not too deep, drive
could drown. If it is only shallow checked. These substances can
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
cause glazing and uneven braking.
water, it can still wash away the water splashes on the ignition
Check the body structure, steering,
ground from under your tires, and system and the vehicle can stall.
suspension, wheels, tires, axles,
you could lose traction and roll Stalling can also occur if you get the
and exhaust system for damage and
the vehicle over. Do not drive tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
check the fuel lines and cooling
through rushing water. under water, you will never be able
system for any leakage.
to start the engine. When going
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, through water, remember that when The vehicle requires more frequent
and flood waters demand extreme the brakes get wet, it might take service due to off-road use. Refer to
caution. longer to stop. See Driving on Wet the Maintenance Schedule for
Roads on page 8‑19. additional information.

Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
vehicle traction and affect your After driving through a large can build up under your vehicle's
ability to stop and accelerate. puddle of water or a car/vehicle tires so they actually ride on the
Always drive slower in these types water. This can happen if the road is
wash, lightly apply the brake
of driving conditions and avoid wet enough and you are going fast
pedal until the brakes work
driving through large puddles and enough. When your vehicle is
normally. hydroplaning, it has little or no
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates contact with the road.
{ WARNING strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle to be carried away. If this slow down when the road is wet.
They might not work as well in a happens, you and other vehicle
quick stop and could cause occupants could drown. Do not
pulling to one side. You could ignore police warnings and be
lose control of the vehicle. very cautious about trying to drive
(Continued) through flowing water.

Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
transmission.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Going down steep or long hills,
tread depth. See Tires on shift to a lower gear.
page 9‑40. . Check the rearview mirror and
. Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)

{ WARNING on page 8‑38 improves vehicle
Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) slippery roads, but apply the brakes
or with the ignition off is Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement.
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
they would not work well. You
fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
would then have poor braking or
Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
even none going down a hill. You freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering
gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice.
. Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces.
speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less
own lane. traction.
. Top of hills: Be alert — Try not to break the fragile traction.
something could be in your If you accelerate too fast, the drive
lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
. Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 8‑34.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 12‑6.
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon
. Turn on the hazard warning monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
time to be sure snow does
flashers. could overcome you and kill you.
not collect there.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so
. Open a window about 5 cm
mirror. you might not know it is in your
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from
{ WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust.
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See
(Continued) Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)

To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
short periods as needed to warm it Out
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
until help arrives but only when you front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
feel really uncomfortable from the system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
cold. Moving about to keep warm between R (Reverse) and a forward
traction system off and use the
also helps. gear, spinning the wheels as little as
rocking method.
possible. To prevent transmission
If it takes some time for help to wear, wait until the wheels stop
arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING spinning before shifting gears.
the engine, push the accelerator Release the accelerator pedal while
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high shifting, and press lightly on the
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you accelerator pedal when the
keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The transmission is in gear. Slowly
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an spinning the wheels in the forward
with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other and reverse directions causes a
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little rocking motion that could free the
as possible and avoid going vehicle. If that does not get the
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as vehicle out after a few tries, it might
shown on the speedometer. need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
For information about using tire Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑72.
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑58.

Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached near the door lock
much weight the vehicle can the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose post. The Tire and Loading
carry. This weight is called the Information label shows the
vehicle capacity weight and control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (A), and the maximum
occupants, cargo and all life of the vehicle.
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
nonfactory‐installed options. kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on the vehicle Tire and Loading Information
show how much weight it may Label The Tire and Loading
properly carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and tire size of the original
the Certification label. equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
{ WARNING pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 9‑40 and Tire
heavier than the Gross Pressure on page 9‑46 .
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the Certification
maximum front or rear Gross label. It tells you the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
If you do, parts on the vehicle and the Gross Axle Weight
can break, and it can change A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
(Continued)
attached to the vehicle's center

Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb
rear axle. See “Certification passengers in your vehicle,
Label” later in this section. the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
Steps for Determining Correct
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
Load Limit
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement “The
5. Determine the combined
combined weight of
weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should
being loaded on the vehicle.
never exceed XXX kg or
That weight may not safely
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
exceed the available cargo
placard. Example 1
and luggage load capacity
2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and Example 1 = 453 kg
6. If your vehicle will be towing
passengers that will be riding (1,000 lbs).
a trailer, the load from your
in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to B. Subtract Occupant
3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this Weight @ 68 kg
weight of the driver and manual to determine how this (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo (300 lbs).
XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
C. Available Occupant and
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 8‑61 (700 lbs).
and luggage load capacity. for important information on
For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips.
vehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant B. Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 68 kg Weight @ 91 kg
(150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification
C. Available Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the lower
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar on the driver side of
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the vehicle or on the rear edge
Loading Information label for of the driver door. The label tells
specific information about the the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The

GVWR includes the weight of WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, the way the vehicle handles. . Never stack heavier
and cargo. Never exceed the These could cause you to lose things, like suitcases,
GVWR for the vehicle, or the control and crash. Also, inside the vehicle so that
Gross Axle Weight Rating overloading can shorten the some of them are above
(GAWR) for either the front or life of the vehicle. the tops of the seats.
rear axle.
. Do not leave an
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy unsecured child restraint
load, it should be spread out. { WARNING in the vehicle.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this Things you put inside the . When you carry something
section. vehicle can strike and injure inside the vehicle, secure
people in a sudden stop or it whenever you can.
turn, or in a crash.
{ WARNING . Do not leave a seat folded
. Put things in the cargo down unless you need to.
Do not load the vehicle any area of the vehicle. In the
heavier than the Gross cargo area, put them as
Vehicle Weight Rating far forward as you can. Try
(GVWR), or either the to spread the weight
maximum front or rear Gross evenly.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued)
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
(Continued)

Starting and can be used. Vehicle speeds Ignition Positions

above 110 km/h (68 mph)
Operating should be limited to
five minutes per use.
New Vehicle Break-In . Avoid making hard stops for
Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 miles) or
need an elaborate break-in. But it so. During this time the new
will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet
if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
. Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier
constant speed, fast or slow, replacement. Follow this
for the first 805 km breaking-in guideline every
(500 miles). Do not make time you get new brake
full-throttle starts. Avoid linings. The ignition switch has four different
downshifting to brake or
. Do not tow a trailer during positions.
slow the vehicle.
break-in. See Driving Notice: Using a tool to force the
. During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing key to turn in the ignition could
(600 miles), avoid using more Tips on page 8‑58 for the cause damage to the switch or
than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities of break the key. Use the correct
in lower gears and avoid your vehicle and more key, make sure it is all the way in,
vehicle speeds above information. and turn it only with your hand.
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following break‐in, engine speed If the key cannot be turned by
. Between the first 1 000 km and load can be gradually hand, see your dealer.
(600 miles) and 5 000 km increased. To shift out of P (Park), turn the
(3,000 miles), heavy
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
acceleration in lower gears
brake pedal.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch Retained Accessory
position from which the key can be stays in this position when the
removed. This locks the steering engine is running. This position can
Power (RAP)
wheel, ignition and automatic be used to operate the electrical These vehicle accessories can be
transmission. accessories, including the used for up to 10 minutes after the
On vehicles with an automatic ventilation fan and 12 volt power engine is turned off:
transmission, the shift lever must be outlet, as well as to display some . Audio System
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch warning and indicator lights.
. Power Windows
to the LOCK/OFF position. The battery could be drained if the
. Sunroof (if equipped)
The ignition switch can bind in the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels or ON/RUN position with the engine Power to the audio system will
turned off center. If this happens, off. The vehicle might not start if the continue to operate for up to
move the steering wheel from right battery is allowed to drain for an 10 minutes or until the driver door is
to left while turning the key to ACC/ extended period of time. opened.
ACCESSORY. If this does not work, D (START): This position starts the Power to the power windows and
then the vehicle needs service. engine. When the engine starts, sunroof will continue to operate for
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This release the key. The ignition switch up to 10 minutes or until any door is
position provides power to some of will return to ON/RUN for normal opened.
the electrical accessories. It unlocks driving.
All these features will work when
the steering wheel and ignition. The A warning tone sounds when the the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
transmission is also unlocked in this driver door is opened if the ignition ACCESSORY.
position on automatic transmission is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
vehicles. To move the key from key is in the ignition.
ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
push in the key and then turn it to
LOCK/OFF.

Starting the Engine The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for
Computer-Controlled Cranking long periods of time, by returning
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or System. This feature assists in the key to the START position
N (Neutral). The engine will not start starting the engine and protects immediately after cranking has
in any other position. To restart the components. If the ignition key is ended, can overheat and damage
vehicle when it is already moving, turned to the START position, the cranking motor, and drain the
use N (Neutral) only. and then released when the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Notice: Do not try to shift to engine begins cranking, the between each try, to let the
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine will continue cranking for cranking motor cool down.
If you do, you could damage the a few seconds or until the 2. If the engine does not start after
transmission. Shift to P (Park) vehicle starts. If the engine does 5 to 10 seconds, especially in
only when the vehicle is stopped. not start and the key is held in very cold weather (below −18°C
START for many seconds, or 0°F), it could be flooded with
Starting Procedure cranking will be stopped after too much gasoline. Push the
1. With your foot off the accelerator 15 seconds to prevent cranking accelerator pedal all the way to
pedal, turn the ignition key to motor damage. To prevent gear the floor and holding it there as
START. When the engine starts, damage, this system also you hold the key in START for a
let go of the key. The idle speed prevents cranking if the engine maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
will go down as the engine is already running. Engine least 15 seconds between each
warms. Do not race the engine cranking can be stopped by try, to allow the cranking motor
immediately after starting it. turning the ignition switch to to cool. When the engine starts,
Operate the engine and ACC/ACCESSORY or let go of the key and accelerator.
transmission gently to allow LOCK/OFF.
the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.

If the vehicle starts briefly but Engine Coolant Heater

then stops again, repeat the { WARNING
procedure. This clears the extra The engine coolant heater,
gasoline from the engine. Do not if available, can help in cold weather Plugging the cord into an
race the engine immediately conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) ungrounded outlet could cause an
after starting it. Operate the for easier starting and better fuel electrical shock. Also, the wrong
engine and transmission gently economy during engine warm-up. kind of extension cord could
until the oil warms up and Plug in the coolant heater at least overheat and cause a fire. You
lubricates all moving parts. four hours before starting the could be seriously injured. Plug
vehicle. An internal thermostat in the cord into a properly grounded
Notice: The engine is designed to the plug-end of the cord will prevent three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
work with the electronics in the engine coolant heater operation at
vehicle. If you add electrical parts If the cord will not reach, use a
temperatures above −18°C (0°F). heavy-duty three-prong extension
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates. To Use The Engine Coolant cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Before adding electrical Heater
equipment, check with your 4. Before starting the engine, be
1. Turn off the engine. sure to unplug and store the
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any 2. Open the hood and unwrap the cord as it was before to keep it
resulting damage would not be electrical cord. away from moving engine parts.
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you do not it could be
The electrical cord is located on damaged.
the passenger side of the engine
compartment, in front of the air The length of time the heater should
cleaner. remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded area where you will be parking the
110-volt AC outlet. vehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park Use this procedure to shift into Leaving the Vehicle With the
P (Park): Engine Running
{ WARNING 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. { WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
See Parking Brake on It can be dangerous to leave the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not page 8‑40 for more information.
fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running.
brake firmly set. The vehicle can 2. Hold the button on the shift lever The vehicle could move suddenly
roll. If you have left the engine and push the lever toward the if the shift lever is not fully in
running, the vehicle can move front of the vehicle into P (Park). P (Park) with the parking brake
suddenly. You or others could be 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. firmly set. And, if you leave the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running, it
4. Remove the key.
not move, even when you are on could overheat and even catch
fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be
that follow. If you are pulling a injured. Do not leave the vehicle
trailer, see Driving Characteristics with the engine running.
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Release the button and check that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park).

Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park Parking Over Things

Torque lock is when the weight of To shift out of P (Park): That Burn
the vehicle puts too much force on
1. Apply the brake pedal.
the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when 2. Press the shift lever button.
{ WARNING
parking on a hill and shifting the Things that can burn could touch
3. Move the shift lever.
transmission into P (Park) is not hot exhaust parts under the
done properly and then it is difficult If you still are unable to shift out of vehicle and ignite. Do not park
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass,
torque lock, set the parking brake 1. Fully release the shift lever or other things that can burn.
and then shift into P (Park). To find button.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously. 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
If torque lock does occur, the again.
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve 3. Move the shift lever.
the parking pawl pressure, so you If you still cannot move the shift
can shift out of P (Park). lever from P (Park), see your dealer
for service.

Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . The vehicle’s exhaust system It is better not to park with the
has been modified, damaged engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. to, here are some things to know.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
. There are holes or openings
can cause unconsciousness and in the vehicle body from { WARNING
even death. damage or after-market
modifications that are not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or
with poor ventilation (parking enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
if it is suspected that exhaust is contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle:
that may block underbody which cannot be seen or smelled.
airflow or tail pipes).
. Drive it only with the windows It can cause unconsciousness
completely down. and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or
. Have the vehicle repaired engine in an enclosed area that
sounds strange or different. has no fresh air ventilation. For
immediately.
. The exhaust system leaks more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the Exhaust on page 8‑34.
engine running in an enclosed
(Continued)
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.

{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
the vehicle if the automatic vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do Do not leave the vehicle when the
not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you
engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the
have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the
could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and
always set the parking brake and The automatic transmission shift move the shift lever to P (Park).
move the shift lever to P (Park). lever is located on the console See Shifting Into Park on
between the seats. page 8‑32. If you are pulling a
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑32. front wheels. Use P (Park) when and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
starting the engine because the
If parking on a hill and pulling a vehicle cannot move easily. The vehicle has an automatic
trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission shift lock control
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58. system. You must fully apply the
regular brake first and then press

the shift lever button before shifting N (Neutral): In this position the D (Drive): This position is for
from P (Park) when the ignition key engine and transmission do not normal driving. It provides the best
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out connect. Use N (Neutral) to restart a fuel economy. If you need more
of P (Park), ease pressure on the vehicle that is already moving. power for passing, and you are:
shift lever, then push the shift lever . Going less than 56 km/h
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
{ WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
press the shift lever button and Shifting into a drive gear while the
move the shift lever into another engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
page 8‑33. firmly on the brake pedal, the the way down.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
back up. You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift
people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) you continue to drive the vehicle
while the vehicle is moving into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the
forward could damage the transmission. Have the vehicle
transmission. The repairs would serviced right away. You can
not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine drive in L (Low) when you are
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The and D (Drive) for higher speeds
To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by until then.
get out of snow, ice or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the M (Manual Mode): Allows the
damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high driver to select the range of gear
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23. speed when shifting the vehicle. positions. If the vehicle has this
feature, see Manual Mode on
page 8‑37.

Manual Mode When shifting to M (Manual Mode), Fuel Economy Mode

the transmission will shift to a preset
Electronic Range Select lower gear range. For this preset The vehicle may have a Fuel
(ERS) Mode range, the highest gear available is Economy Mode. When engaged,
displayed next to the M in the DIC. fuel economy mode can improve the
ERS or manual mode allows for the vehicle's fuel economy.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
selection of the range of gear
positions. Use this mode when
All gears below that number are
driving down hill or towing a trailer
available to use. For example, when
to limit the top gear and vehicle
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
speed. The shift position indicator
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
within the Driver Information Center
shifted automatically. To shift to
(DIC) will display a number next to
5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)
the M indicating the highest
button or shift into D (Drive).
available gear under manual mode
and the driving conditions when M (Manual Mode) will prevent
manual mode was selected. shifting to a lower gear range if the
engine speed is too high. If vehicle
To use this feature:
speed is not reduced within the time
1. Move the shift lever to allowed, the lower gear range shift
M (Manual Mode). will not be completed. Slow the Press the “eco” (economy) button
vehicle, then press the − (Minus) by the shift lever to turn this feature
2. Press the plus/minus button on on or off. The “eco” light in the
the shift lever, to increase or button to the desired lower gear
range. instrument cluster will come on
decrease the gear range when engaged. See Fuel Economy
available. While using the ERS, cruise control Light on page 4‑22.
can be used.

For vehicles with a Driver Drive Systems Brakes

Information Center (DIC) an
“ECO Mode On” message displays.
See Fuel System Messages on All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
page 4‑30 for more information. With this feature, engine power is System (ABS)
When Fuel Economy Mode is on: always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as System (ABS), an advanced
. The transmission will upshift needed for road conditions.
sooner and downshift later. electronic braking system that helps
When using a compact spare tire on prevent a braking skid.
. The torque converter clutch will an AWD vehicle, the system
apply sooner and stay on longer. When the engine is started and the
automatically detects the compact vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
. The gas pedal will be less spare and disables AWD. To restore checks itself. A momentary motor or
sensitive. AWD operation and prevent clicking noise might be heard while
excessive wear on system, replace this test is going on, and it might
. The vehicle's computer will more
the compact spare with a full-size even be noticed that the brake
aggressively shut off fuel to the tire as soon as possible. See
engine under deceleration. pedal moves a little. This is normal.
Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑68
. The engine idle speed will be for more information.
lower.
. Driving performance is more
conservative.

As the brakes are applied, the Using ABS

computer keeps receiving updates
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
on wheel speed and controls
the brake pedal down firmly and let
braking pressure accordingly.
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
Remember: ABS does not change might be heard operating, and the
the time needed to get a foot up to brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
If there is a problem with ABS, this the brake pedal or always decrease but this is normal.
warning light stays on. See Antilock stopping distance. If you get too
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light close to the vehicle in front of you, Braking in Emergencies
on page 4‑20. there will not be enough time to ABS allows the driver to steer and
If driving safely on a wet road and it apply the brakes if that vehicle brake at the same time. In many
becomes necessary to slam on the suddenly slows or stops. Always emergencies, steering can help
brakes and continue braking to leave enough room up ahead to more than even the very best
avoid a sudden obstacle, a stop, even with ABS. braking.
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The
foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake
To set the parking brake, hold the If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates.
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsations or
If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on.
system warning light will come on. pedal movement during this time
See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are is normal and the driver should
on page 4‑19. parking on a hill, see Driving continue to apply the brake pedal
Characteristics and Towing Tips on as the driving situation dictates.
page 8‑58. The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist normal.
(HSA) feature, which may be useful Traction Control
when the vehicle is stopped on a System (TCS)
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling, The vehicle has a Traction Control
either forward or rearward, during System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
vehicle drive off. After driver On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
completely stops and holds the system operates if it senses that
vehicle in a complete standstill on a one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
grade, HSA will be automatically will flash to indicate that the traction
activated. During the transition traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will control system is active.
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts operate if it senses that any of the This warning light comes on if there
to accelerate to drive off on a grade, wheels are spinning or beginning to is a problem with TCS, and the
HSA holds the braking pressure to lose traction. When this happens, system will not limit wheel spin.
ensure that there is no rolling back. the system brakes the spinning Adjust your driving accordingly.
The brakes will automatically wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
release when the accelerator pedal power to limit wheel spin.
is applied within the two second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).

TCS automatically comes on On AWD vehicles, when TCS is

whenever the vehicle is started. To turned off, the system may still
limit wheel spin, especially in make noise. This is normal and
slippery road conditions, the system necessary with AWD hardware.
should always be left on. But, TCS It may be necessary to turn the
can be turned off if needed. system off if the vehicle ever gets
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake stuck in sand, mud or snow and Traction control can be turned off by
or accelerate heavily when TCS is rocking the vehicle is required. See pressing and releasing the TCS/
off. The vehicle's driveline could If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23 StabiliTrak button, on the console,
be damaged. for more information. See also until the TCS/StabiliTrak light comes
Winter Driving on page 8‑21 for on the instrument panel and
information on using TCS when “Traction Control Off” appears in the
driving in snowy or icy conditions. DIC. Press the button again to turn
the system back on. For information
on turning StabiliTrak off and on,
see “StabiliTrak System” following in
this section.
The TCS off light comes on and Adding non‐GM accessories can
“Traction Control Off” is displayed affect the vehicle's performance.
on the Driver Information Center See Accessories and Modifications
(DIC) to indicate that the traction on page 9‑4 for more information.
control system has been turned off.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 4‑31.

StabiliTrak System This also occurs when traction

control is activated. A noise may
The vehicle has a vehicle stability be heard or vibration may be felt in
enhancement system called the brake pedal. This is normal.
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced Continue to steer the vehicle in the
computer controlled system that intended direction.
assists with directional control of the StabiliTrak can be turned off by
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, a “Service StabiliTrak” pressing and holding the TCS/
StabiliTrak activates when the message will be displayed on the StabiliTrak button, on the console,
computer senses a difference Driver Information Center (DIC). until the TCS Off and StabiliTrak Off
between the intended path and the When this message is displayed lights come on the instrument panel
direction the vehicle is actually and the StabiliTrak light comes on, and “StabiliTrak Off” appears in the
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively the system is not operational. DIC. For information on turning TCS
applies braking pressure at any one Driving should be adjusted off and on, see “Traction Control
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer accordingly. See Ride Control System (TCS)” earlier in this
the vehicle in the intended direction. System Messages on page 4‑31. section.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically If cruise control is being used when

whenever the vehicle is started. To StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
assist with directional control of the control will automatically disengage.
vehicle, the system should always Press the cruise control button to
be left on. reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
When the stability control system
activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument panel.

Cruise Control { WARNING

With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous
(25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use
control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding
below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise Cruise control can be dangerous
control is turned off. on slippery roads. On such roads,
If the vehicle has a StabiliTrak® or fast changes in tire traction can
traction control system and begins cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use The cruise control buttons are
to limit wheel spin while using
cruise control on slippery roads. located on the steering wheel.
cruise control, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43 or cruise control system on and off.
Traction Control System (TCS) on \ (Cancel): Press to disengage
page 8‑41. When road conditions cruise control without erasing the
allow you to safely use it again, the set speed from memory.
cruise control can be turned
back on. RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
thumbwheel up to resume a set
speed or to accelerate to a higher
speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the Resuming a Set Speed

. To increase the speed in small
thumbwheel down toward SET/− amounts, move the thumbwheel
If the cruise control is set at a up toward RES/+ briefly and
to set a speed and activate cruise desired speed and then the brakes
control, or to make the vehicle then release it. Each time this is
are applied or the Cancel button is done, the vehicle goes about
decelerate. pressed, the cruise control is 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Setting Cruise Control disengaged without erasing the
set speed from memory. Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise button is on when not in Cruise Control
use, it could get bumped and go into Once the vehicle reaches about
cruise when not desired. Keep the 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move If the cruise control system is
cruise button turned off when cruise the thumbwheel up toward RES/+ already activated,
control is not being used. briefly. The vehicle returns to the . Move the thumbwheel down
speed selected previously and stays toward SET/− and hold until the
To set a speed: there. desired lower speed is reached,
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise Increasing Speed While Using then release it.
control system on. Cruise Control . To slow down in very small
2. Get to the speed desired. If the cruise control system is amounts, move the thumbwheel
3. Move the thumbwheel down already activated, down toward SET/− briefly and
toward SET/− and release it. then release it. Each time this is
. Move the thumbwheel up done, the vehicle goes about
The desired set speed briefly toward RES/+ and hold it until
appears in the instrument panel 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
the vehicle accelerates to the
cluster. desired speed, and then
4. Take your foot off the accelerator release it.
pedal.

Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

Using Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise
Use the accelerator pedal to control:
Systems
increase the vehicle's speed. . Step lightly on the brake pedal
When you take your foot off the Ultrasonic Parking Assist
or clutch; when cruise control
pedal, the vehicle will slow down to disengages, the indicator light For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
the previous set cruise speed. will go off. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Using Cruise Control on Hills it assists the driver with parking
. Press \. and avoiding objects while in
How well the cruise control works R (Reverse). URPA operates at
on hills depends upon the vehicle . Press 5 to turn the cruise
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
speed, load, and the steepness of control system off completely. and the sensors on the rear bumper
the hills. When going up steep hills, The cruise control cannot be detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
you might have to step on the resumed. behind the vehicle, and at least
accelerator pedal to maintain the 20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
Erasing Speed Memory
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or The cruise control set speed is
shift to a lower gear to maintain the erased from memory by pressing
vehicle's speed. When the brakes the 5 button or if the ignition is
are applied the cruise control turned off.
shuts off.

The display is located in the If the vehicle is traveling faster then

{ WARNING headliner. 8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red
URPA uses three color-coded lights light on the rear display flashes.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not to provide distance and system Objects must be at least 20 cm (8 in)
replace driver vision. It cannot information. off the ground, below liftgate level,
detect: and within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
bumper to be detected. The
. Objects that are below the distance may be less during warmer
bumper, underneath the or humid weather.
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle A single beep sounds the first time
an object is detected between 0.6 m
. Children, pedestrians, (23 in) and 2.5 m (8 ft) away.
bicyclists, or pets. Beeping occurs continuously when
If you do not use proper care the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in) or closer
before and while backing; vehicle to an object.
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before How the System Works
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check URPA comes on automatically and
the vehicle's mirrors. the display briefly illuminates to
indicate the system is working when
the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse).

The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle When the System Does Not
gets closer to a detected object: Seem to Work Properly
Description Metric English If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
amber light 2.5 m 8 ft
condition, the message Park Assist
amber/amber lights 1.0 m 40 in Off displays on the DIC and a red
amber/amber/red lights and light is shown on the rear URPA
continuous beeping for 0.6 m 23 in display when the shift lever is
five seconds moved into R (Reverse). This can
occur under the following
amber/amber/red lights flashing conditions:
and continuous beeping for 0.3 m 1 ft . The ultrasonic sensors are not
five seconds
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
Park Assist Off displays on the The settings are: instructions, see Exterior Care
Driver Information Center (DIC) to . On: Turns URPA on on page 9‑75.
indicate that URPA is off, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on . Off: Turns URPA off . A trailer was attached to the
page 4‑24 for more information. vehicle, or an object was
. Tow Bar: Use when a tow bar is hanging out of the liftgate during
System Settings attached to the vehicle the last drive cycle, a red light
Each time the vehicle is started Tow Bar may come on in the rear display.
URPA defaults to the On setting. Once the attached object is
When the tow bar setting is used,
removed, URPA will return to
Use the Vehicle Personalization on an area of 16 cm (6 in) around the
normal operation.
page 4‑34 menu to hitch is not detected by the system.
configure URPA.

. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle and the tow bar setting is
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)
not being used, or an odd Camera (RVC)
shaped tow bar is attached to The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only
the vehicle and the tow bar Camera (RVC) system. Read this looking at the RVC screen, or use
setting is being used. entire section before using it. the screen during longer, higher
. The vehicle's bumper is The RVC can assist the driver when speed backing maneuvers or
damaged. Take the vehicle to backing up by displaying a view of where there could be cross-traffic.
your dealer to repair the system. the area behind the vehicle. Your judged distances using the
. Other conditions may affect screen will differ from actual
distances.
system performance, such as { WARNING
vibrations from a jackhammer or So if you do not use proper care
the compression of air brakes on The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) before backing up, you could hit a
a very large truck. system does not replace driver vehicle, child, pedestrian,
If the system is still disabled, after vision. RVC does not: bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
driving forward at least 25 km/h . Detect objects that are vehicle damage, injury, or death.
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your outside the camera's field of Even though the vehicle has the
dealer. view, below the bumper, RVC system, always check
or underneath the vehicle. carefully before backing up by
. Detect children, pedestrians, checking behind and around the
bicyclists, or pets. vehicle.
(Continued)

Vehicles Without a Navigation Vehicles With a Navigation Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System System System On or Off
When the key is in the ON/RUN An image appears on the navigation To turn the rear vision camera
position and the driver shifts the screen with the message “Check system on or off:
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video Surroundings for Safety” when the 1. Shift into P (Park).
image automatically appears on the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
inside rear view mirror. Once the The navigation screen goes to the 2. Press the CONFIG button.
driver shifts out of R (Reverse), previous screen after approximately 3. Select Display.
the video image automatically 10 seconds once the vehicle is
disappears from the inside rear view shifted out of R (Reverse).
mirror. To cancel the delay, do one of the
Turning the Rear Vision Camera following:
System Off or On . Press a hard key on the
To turn off the RVC system, press navigation system.
and hold z, located on the inside . Shift into P (Park).
rearview mirror, until the left . Reach a vehicle speed of
indicator light turns off. The RVC 8 km/h (5 mph).
display is now disabled.
To turn the RVC system on again,
press and hold z until the left
4. Select Camera. When a check
indicator light illuminates. The RVC mark appears next to the
system display is now enabled and Camera option, then the RVC
the display will appear in the mirror system is on.
normally.

Symbols Guidelines Rear Vision Camera Location

The navigation system may have a The RVC system has a guideline
feature that lets the driver view overlay that can help the driver align
symbols on the navigation screen the vehicle when backing into a
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic parking spot.
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system To turn the guidelines on or off:
must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. The error message 1. Shift into P (Park).
“Rear Parking Assist Symbols 2. Press the CONFIG button.
Unavailable” may display if URPA
has been disabled and the symbols 3. Select Display.
have been turned on. See 4. Select Guidelines. When a
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on check mark appears next to the
page 8‑46. Guidelines option, guidelines will
The symbols appear and may cover appear. The camera is located above the
an object when viewing the license plate.
Rear Vision Camera Error
navigation screen when an object is Messages The area displayed by the camera is
detected by the URPA system. limited.
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
To turn the symbols on or off: SYSTEM: This message can It does not display objects that are
1. Shift into P (Park). display on the navigation screen close to either corner or under the
when the system is not receiving bumper and can vary depending on
2. Press the CONFIG button. information it requires from other vehicle orientation or road
3. Select Display. vehicle systems. conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
4. Select Symbols. When a check If any other problem occurs or if a different from the actual distance.
mark appears next to the problem persists, see your dealer.
Symbols option, symbols will
appear.
The following illustration shows the A. View displayed by the camera.

. The back of the vehicle is in an
field of view that the camera accident, the position and
B. Corner of the rear bumper. mounting angle of the camera
provides.
When the System Does Not can change or the camera can
Seem To Work Properly be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
The RVC system may not work mounting angle checked at your
properly or display a clear image if: dealer.
. The RVC is turned off. See The RVC system display in the
“Turning the Rear Camera rearview mirror may turn off or not
System On or Off” earlier in this appear as expected due to one of
section. the following conditions. If this
. It is dark. occurs the left indicator light on the
mirror will flash.
. The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
. A slow flash may indicate a loss
the camera lens. of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else cycle.
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.

. A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the Fuel
maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an
a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper
has reached an over maintenance of this vehicle. To help
temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain
The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we
used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline
from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
conditions. Once conditions Gasoline.
return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the
reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards
During any of these fault conditions, developed by auto companies. A list
the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER
indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com.
or until the conditions return to
normal.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.

Recommended Fuel California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements Countries
a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another
higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or
than 87, an audible knocking noise, designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be
commonly referred to as spark meet California specifications. See hard to find. Never use leaded
knock, might be heard when driving. the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text
at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be
when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty.
87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission
needs service. To check the fuel availability, ask an
control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil
be affected. The malfunction company that does business in the
Gasoline Specifications indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
ASTM specification D 4814 in the See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 page 4‑16. If this occurs, return to
or 3.511 in Canada. Some your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
gasolines contain an If it is determined that the condition
octane-enhancing additive is caused by the type of fuel used,
called methylcyclopentadienyl repairs might not be covered by the
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). vehicle warranty.
We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel
Additives on page 8‑55 for
additional information.

Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel
in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can
required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel
help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic
deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage
emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the
properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty.
should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
However, some gasolines contain Some gasolines that are
your dealer. not reformulated for low
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
injectors and intake valves clean, available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
or if the vehicle experiences recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
problems due to dirty injectors or gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
valves, look for gasoline that is specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
Gasoline. Look for the TOP other fuels containing more than the life of spark plugs and the
TIER label on the fuel pump to 10% ethanol must not be used in performance of the emission control
ensure gasoline meets enhanced vehicles that were not designed for system could be affected. The
detergency standards developed by those fuels. malfunction indicator lamp might
the auto companies. A list of turn on. If this occurs, return to your
marketers providing TOP TIER dealer for service.
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.

Filling the Tank The fuel cap is behind the fuel door Do not top off or overfill the tank and
on the vehicle's passenger side. wait a few seconds before removing
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
{ WARNING to remove. Do not release the cap surfaces as soon as possible. See
Fuel vapor burns violently and a too soon or it will spring back. Exterior Care on page 9‑75.
Reinstall the cap by turning it
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
clockwise until it clicks. { WARNING
others, read and follow all the If the cap is not properly installed,
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp If a fire starts while you are
instructions on the fuel pump
come on. See Malfunction Indicator refueling, do not remove the
island. Turn off the engine when
Lamp on page 4‑16 for more nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
information. shutting off the pump or by
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
notifying the station attendant.
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking { WARNING Leave the area immediately.
materials away from fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is
leave the fuel pump unattended Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly. needed, be sure to get the right
when refueling the vehicle. This is type of cap from your dealer. The
against the law in some places. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be wrong type fuel cap might not fit
Do not re-enter the vehicle while properly, might cause the
pumping fuel. Keep children away badly burned. This spray can
malfunction indicator lamp to
from the fuel pump; never let happen if the tank is nearly full,
light, and could damage the fuel
children pump fuel. and is more likely in hot weather.
tank and emissions system. See
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
for any hiss noise to stop. Then page 4‑16.
unscrew the cap all the way.

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill Information
opening before operating the
Never fill a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
nozzle. Contact should be been designed for the vehicle.
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
electricity discharge from the Contact your dealer or trailering
complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to
the ground. tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment”.

For information on towing a disabled The following information has

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules for
page 9‑72. For information on your safety and that of your
towing the vehicle behind another the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer passengers. Read this section
vehicle — such as a motorhome, only if all the steps in this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on have been followed. Ask your
page 9‑72. dealer for advice and information Pulling A Trailer
about towing a trailer with the Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics vehicle. . There are many laws, including
and Towing Tips speed limit restrictions that apply
The vehicle can tow a trailer when to trailering. Check for legal
equipped with the proper trailer
{ WARNING towing equipment. For trailering
requirements with state or
provincial police.
capacity, see “Trailer Towing”
The driver can lose control when . Do not tow a trailer at all during
following in this section. Trailering
pulling a trailer if the correct changes handling, acceleration, the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
equipment is not used or the braking, durability and fuel the new vehicle is driven. The
vehicle is not driven properly. economy. With the added weight, engine, axle or other parts could
For example, if the trailer is too the engine, transmission, wheel be damaged.
heavy, the brakes may not work assemblies and tires are forced to . During the first 800 km
well — or even at all. The driver work harder and under greater (500 miles) that a trailer is
and passengers could be loads. The trailer also adds wind towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
seriously injured. The vehicle may resistance, increasing the pulling (50 mph) and do not make starts
also be damaged; the resulting requirements. For safe trailering, at full throttle. This reduces wear
repairs would not be covered by correctly use the proper trailering on the vehicle.
(Continued) equipment.
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode Check all trailer hitch parts and Following Distance
when towing. attachments, safety chains,
Stay at least twice as far behind the
. Obey speed limit restrictions. electrical connectors, lamps, tires
vehicle ahead as you would when
Do not drive faster than the and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
maximum posted speed for has electric brakes, start the vehicle
This can help to avoid situations
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h and trailer moving and then apply
that require heavy braking and
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the the trailer brake controller by hand
sudden turns.
vehicle. to be sure the brakes are working.
. For vehicles with the Ultra Rear During the trip, check regularly to be Passing
Parking Assist (URPA) system, sure that the load is secure, and the More passing distance is needed
turn the system off when towing lamps and trailer brakes are working when towing a trailer. Because the
a trailer. If the tow bar is properly. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
installed while not towing a farther beyond the passed vehicle
Towing with a Stability Control
trailer, change the URPA system before returning to the lane.
to the “Tow Bar” setting. See System
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on When towing, the sound of the Backing Up
page 8‑46 for more information. stability control system might be Hold the bottom of the steering
heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. To move the
Driving with a Trailer vehicle movement caused by the trailer to the left, move that hand to
Towing a trailer requires experience. trailer, which mainly occurs during the left. To move the trailer to the
Get familiar with handling and cornering. This is normal when right, move your hand to the right.
braking with the added trailer towing heavier trailers. Always back up slowly and,
weight. The vehicle is now longer if possible, have someone
and not as responsive as the guide you.
vehicle is by itself.

Making Turns are burned out. Check occasionally engine off. If the overheat warning
to be sure the trailer bulbs are still comes on, see Engine Overheating
Notice: Making very sharp turns
working. on page 9‑18.
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the Driving On Grades Parking on Hills
vehicle. The vehicle could be
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering. gear before starting down a long or { WARNING
steep downgrade. If the
When turning with a trailer, make transmission is not shifted down, the Parking the vehicle on a hill with
wider turns than normal so the brakes might have to be used so the trailer attached can be
trailer will not strike soft shoulders, much that they would get hot and no dangerous. If something goes
curbs, road signs, trees or other longer work well. wrong, the rig could start to move.
objects. Use the turn signal well in People can be injured, and both
advance and avoid jerky or sudden The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
the vehicle and the trailer can be
maneuvers. Use a lower gear if the transmission
damaged. When possible, always
shifts too often.
park the rig on a flat surface.
Turn Signals When Towing When towing at high altitude on
a Trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant If parking the rig on a hill:
The turn signal indicators on the will boil at a lower temperature than
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
instrument panel flash whenever at normal altitudes. If the engine is
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
signaling a turn or lane change. turned off immediately after towing
the wheels into the curb if facing
Properly hooked up, the trailer at high altitude on steep uphill
downhill or into traffic if facing
lamps also flash, telling other grades, the vehicle may show signs
uphill.
drivers the vehicle is turning, similar to engine overheating. To
changing lanes or stopping. avoid this, let the engine run while 2. Have someone place chocks
parked, preferably on level ground, under the trailer wheels.
When towing a trailer, the arrows with the transmission in P (Park) for
on the instrument panel flash for a few minutes before turning the
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer

3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing
place, release the brake pedal Towing
until the chocks absorb the load. Before pulling a trailer, there are
The vehicle needs service more three important considerations that
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this have to do with weight:
apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or
into P (Park).
. The weight of the trailer
Index for more information. Things
5. Release the brake pedal. that are especially important in . The weight of the trailer tongue
trailer operation are automatic . The total weight on the vehicle's
Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle tires
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before Weight of the Trailer
2. Start the engine. and during the trip.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
3. Shift into a gear. Check periodically to see that all
Speed, altitude, road grades,
4. Release the parking brake. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
outside temperature, special
5. Let up on the brake pedal. Engine Cooling When Trailer equipment, and the amount of
Towing tongue weight the vehicle can carry
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is must be considered. See “Weight of
clear of the chocks. The cooling system may temporarily the Trailer Tongue” later in this
7. Stop and have someone pick up overheat during severe operating section for more information.
and store the chocks. conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑18. Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, If there are a lot of options,
based upon the vehicle model and options. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Maximum Trailer GCWR* weight the vehicle can carry, which
Weight with Trailer will also reduce the trailer weight the
Vehicle Brakes† vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs) the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs) be carrying that weight, too. See
V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs) Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)
† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg
(1,000 lbs) and the GCWR is 2 300 kg (5,071 lbs). See Towing Equipment
*The Gross Combination Weight Weight of the Trailer Tongue

Rating (GCWR) is the total
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
allowable weight of the completely
an important weight to measure
loaded vehicle and trailer including
because it affects the total gross
any passengers, cargo, equipment
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
and conversions. The GCWR for the
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
vehicle should not be exceeded. If a weight-carrying hitch or a
curb weight of the vehicle, any
Ask your dealer for our trailering cargo carried in it, and the people weight-distributing hitch is being
information or advice. See who will be riding in the vehicle. used, the trailer tongue (A) should
Customer Assistance Offices on weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
page 12‑3 for more information. loaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's Towing Equipment
trailer and then the tongue, Tires
separately, to see if the weights are Hitches
proper. If they are not, adjustments Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These Use the correct hitch equipment.
might be made by moving some See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
items around in the trailer. numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle assistance.
Trailering may be limited by the Load Limits on page 8‑24 for more . The rear bumper on the vehicle
vehicle's ability to carry tongue information. Do not go over the is not intended for hitches. Do
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause GVW limit for the vehicle, or the not attach rental hitches or other
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR GAWR, including the weight of the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or trailer tongue. If using a weight only a frame-mounted hitch that
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle distributing hitch, do not go over the does not attach to the bumper.
Weight Rating). The effect of rear axle limit before applying the
additional weight may reduce the weight distribution spring bars.
. Will any holes be made in the
trailering capacity more than the body of the vehicle when the
total of the additional weight. trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
It is important that the vehicle hitch is removed. If the holes are
does not exceed any of its not sealed, dirt, water, and
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue from the exhaust can get into the
Weight. The only way to be sure it is vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
not exceeding any of these ratings page 8‑34.
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Safety Chains Trailer Sway Conversions and

Always attach chains between the Control (TSC) Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Control (TSC) feature as part of the Add-On Electrical
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
from contacting the road if it
that the trailer is swaying, the
Equipment
becomes separated from the hitch.
vehicle's brakes are automatically Notice: Do not add anything
Leave enough slack so the rig can
applied. electrical to the vehicle unless
turn. Never allow safety chains to
you check with your dealer first.
drag on the ground.
Some electrical equipment can
Trailer Brakes damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
Does the trailer have its own the vehicle's warranty. Some
brakes? Be sure to read and follow add-on electrical equipment can
the instructions for the trailer brakes keep other components from
so they are installed, adjusted and working as they should.
When TSC is applying the brakes,
maintained properly.
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light Add-on equipment can drain the
Because the vehicle has antilock flashes to notify the driver to reduce vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's speed. See Traction Control System not operating.
brake system. If this is done, both (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
brake systems will not work well, page 4‑21. If the trailer continues to The vehicle has an airbag system.
or at all. sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine Before attempting to add anything
torque to help slow the vehicle. electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is Vehicle on page 2‑34 and Adding
turned off. Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑35.

Vehicle Care 9-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Bulb Replacement
General Information Power Steering Fluid (2.4L Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
California Proposition Power Steering Fluid (3.0L Sidemarker, and Parking
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
California Perchlorate Materials Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . 9-32
Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-25 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission Shift Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Lock Control System
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Engine Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Ignition Transmission Lock
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Instrument Panel Fuse
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Park Brake and P (Park)
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 9-11 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

9-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Towing

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Different Size Tires and Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-40 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Recreational Vehicle
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Uniform Tire Quality Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Tire Terminology and Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Wheel Alignment and Tire Appearance Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Tire Pressure Monitor Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Tire Pressure Monitor If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
When It Is Time for New Jump Starting
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Vehicle Care 9-3
General Information California Proposition California Perchlorate

For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning Materials Requirements
your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag
and supported service people. known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in
these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine remote keyless transmitters, may
exhaust, many parts and systems, contain perchlorate materials.
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary.
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

9-4 Vehicle Care
Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks

complement and function with other
Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer dealer can accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own
accessories to the vehicle can affect using genuine GM Accessories. Service Work
vehicle performance and safety, When you go to your GM dealer and
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and
{ WARNING
emissions systems, aerodynamics, supported service technicians will You can be injured and the
durability, and electronic systems perform the work using genuine GM vehicle could be damaged if you
like antilock brakes, traction control, Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle
and stability control. Some of these Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it.
accessories could even cause Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
malfunction or damage not covered
. Be sure you have sufficient
page 2‑35. knowledge, experience,
by the vehicle warranty.
the proper replacement
Damage to vehicle components parts, and tools before
resulting from the installation or use attempting any vehicle
of non‐GM certified parts, including maintenance task.
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
. Be sure to use the proper
vehicle warranty and may affect nuts, bolts, and other
remaining warranty coverage for fasteners. English and metric
affected parts. fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.

Vehicle Care 9-5
If doing some of your own service Hood

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood:
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑34. 2. Move the secondary hood
release lever to the right to
Keep a record with all parts receipts
release the striker. The lever is
and list the mileage and the date of
near the middle of the hood.
any service work performed. See 1. Pull the release handle with the
Maintenance Records on symbol on it. It is below the 3. Lift the hood.
page 10‑10. instrument panel, to the left of Before closing the hood, check all
the steering wheel. filler caps are properly installed.

9-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine

Vehicle Care 9-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See I. Battery on page 9‑24.
page 9‑13. Brakes on page 9‑21. J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
B. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. F. Engine Compartment Fuse Pressure Cap. See Engine
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of Block on page 9‑34. Coolant on page 9‑15.
view). See Engine Oil on G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. K. Windshield Washer Fluid
page 9‑10. See Jump Starting on Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine page 9‑69. page 9‑21.
Oil on page 9‑10. H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑69.

9-8 Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine

Vehicle Care 9-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Cover

page 9‑13. Block on page 9‑34.
B. Power Steering Fluid (2.4L L4 H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
3.0L V6 Engine Cover
Engine) on page 9‑20 or See Jump Starting on
Power Steering Fluid (3.0L page 9‑69.
V6 Engine) on page 9‑20. I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on
Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑69.
D. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. J. Battery on page 9‑24.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
view). See Engine Oil on Pressure Cap. See Engine
page 9‑10. Coolant on page 9‑15.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See L. Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes on page 9‑21. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21. To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap.
2. Hold cover on both sides and
pull upward.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Install cover by aligning on oil fill
tube, then firmly pushing down
onto the intake manifold.
5. Install the oil fill cap.

9-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must See Engine Compartment Overview
be on level ground. on page 9‑6 for the location of the
If the oil is below the cross-hatched engine oil fill cap.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a
yellow loop. See Engine area at the tip of the dipstick, add at Add enough oil to put the level
Compartment Overview on least one liter/quart of the somewhere in the proper operating
page 9‑6 for the location of the recommended oil. This section range. Push the dipstick all the way
engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. For back in when through.
engine oil crankcase capacity, see
1. Turn off the engine and give the Capacities and Specifications on What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
oil several minutes to drain back page 11‑2. Look for three things:
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not Notice: Do not add too much oil. . GM6094M
show the actual level. If the engine has so much oil that
Use only an oil that meets GM
the oil level gets above the
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it Standard GM6094M.
cross-hatched area that shows
with a paper towel or cloth, then the proper operating range, the . SAE 5W-30
push it back in all the way. engine could be damaged.
Remove it again, keeping the tip SAE 5W-30 is best for the
down, and check the level. vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.

Vehicle Care 9-11
. American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Cold Temperature Operation Engine Oil Life System
If in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −29°C
When to Change Engine Oil
(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30 This vehicle has a computer system
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 that indicates when to change the
engine oil. Both provide easier cold engine oil and filter. This is based
starting for the engine at extremely on engine revolutions and engine
low temperatures. Always use an oil temperature, and not on mileage.
Oils meeting these requirements that meets the required Based on driving conditions, the
should have the starburst specification, GM6094M. mileage at which an oil change is
symbol on the container. This indicated can vary considerably. For
Engine Oil Additives / Engine the oil life system to work properly,
symbol indicates that the oil has Oil Flushes
been certified by the American the system must be reset every time
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not add anything to the oil. The the oil is changed.
recommended oils with the starburst When the system has calculated
Notice: Use only engine oil symbol that meet GM standards are
identified as meeting GM that oil life has been diminished, it
all that is needed for good indicates that an oil change is
Standard GM6094M and showing performance and engine protection.
the American Petroleum Institute necessary. A “Change Engine Oil
Certified For Gasoline Engines Engine oil system flushes are not Soon” message comes on. See
starburst symbol. Failure to use recommended and could cause Engine Oil Messages on
the recommended oil can result engine damage not covered by the page 4‑30. Change the oil as soon
in engine damage not covered by vehicle warranty. as possible within the next 1 000 km
the vehicle warranty. (600 miles). It is possible that,
if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least

9-12 Vehicle Care
once a year and at this time the If the vehicle has Driver Information Used oil can be a threat to the
system must be reset. Your dealer Center (DIC) buttons: environment. If you change your
has trained service people who will 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
perform this work using genuine with the engine off. from the filter before disposal. Never
parts and reset the system. It is also dispose of oil by putting it in the
important to check the oil regularly 2. Press the DIC menu button until trash, pouring it on the ground, into
and keep it at the proper level. “Remaining Oil Life” displays. sewers, or into streams or bodies of
If the system is ever reset 3. Press and hold the set/clear water. Recycle it by taking it to a
accidentally, the oil must be button until “100%” is displayed. place that collects used oil.
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
since the last oil change. Automatic Transmission
Remember to reset the oil life The system is reset when the Fluid
system whenever the oil is changed. “Change Engine Oil Soon” message
goes off. How to Check Automatic
How to Reset the Engine Oil Transmission Fluid
Life System What to Do with Used Oil
It is not necessary to check the
Reset the system whenever the Used engine oil contains elements
transmission fluid level.
engine oil is changed so that the that can be unhealthy for your skin
A transmission fluid leak is the only
system can calculate the next and could even cause cancer. Do
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
engine oil change. To reset the not let used oil stay on your skin.
occurs, take the vehicle to your
system: Clean your skin and nails with soap
dealer service department and have
and water, or a good hand cleaner.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with it repaired as soon as possible.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing
the engine off. or rags. See the manufacturer's
2. Fully press and release the warnings about the use and
accelerator pedal three times disposal of oil products.
within five seconds.

Vehicle Care 9-13
There is a special procedure for Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air
checking and changing the cleaner/filter:
transmission fluid. Because this See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
procedure is difficult, this should be page 9‑5.
done at your dealer service engine air cleaner/filter.
department. Contact your dealer for 2. Locate the air filter housing on
When to Inspect the Engine Air the front passenger side of the
additional information or the
Cleaner/Filter engine compartment. See
procedure can be found in the
service manual. To purchase a Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Engine Compartment Overview
service manual, see Service Maintenance II intervals and replace on page 9‑6.
Publications Ordering Information on it at the first oil change after each
page 12‑12. 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
Maintenance on page 10‑2, and be
inspect the filter at each engine oil
sure to use the fluid listed in
change.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7. How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter 3. Remove the four air cleaner
remains caked with dirt, a new filter housing cover screws.
is required. 4. Pull straight up on cover, and
while holding the cover, remove
the air filter.

9-14 Vehicle Care
How to Reinstall Engine Air Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

Cleaner/Filter off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
1. Install the air cleaner into the air Always have the air cleaner/filter
cleaner housing. The outer air in place when you are driving.
cleaner filter seal must be fitted
properly in the air cleaner
housing.
Cooling System
2. Align the air cleaner housing
cover tabs to the air cleaner
housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing
cover using the four screws. 3.0 L V6 Engine
A. Engine Cooling Fans
{ WARNING B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Operating the engine with the air Pressure Cap
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air { WARNING
cleaner not only cleans the air; it 2.4 L L4 Engine
helps to stop flames if the engine An electric engine cooling fan
A. Engine Cooling Fan under the hood can start up even
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and when the engine is not running
Pressure Cap and can cause injury. Keep
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

Vehicle Care 9-15
If the coolant inside the coolant If there seems to be no leak, with Engine Coolant
surge tank is boiling, do not do the engine on, check to see if the
anything else until it cools down. electric engine cooling fan is The cooling system in the vehicle is
Park the vehicle on a level surface. running. If the engine is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
overheating, the fan should be coolant. This coolant is designed to
The coolant level should be at the remain in the vehicle for five years
COLD FILL line. If it is not, there running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine. or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
might be a leak at the radiator whichever occurs first.
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water Notice: Using coolant other than
pump, or somewhere else in the DEX-COOL® can cause premature The following explains the cooling
cooling system. engine, heater core, or radiator system and how to check and add
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
{ WARNING coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km see Engine Overheating on
Heater and radiator hoses, and (30,000 miles) or 24 months, page 9‑18.
other engine parts, can be very whichever occurs first. Any
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, repairs would not be covered by
you can be burned. the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
Do not run the engine if there is a in the vehicle.
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.

9-16 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
The vehicle must be on a level
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Adding only plain water to the This mixture:
cooling system can be Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Gives freezing protection down
dangerous. Plain water, or some the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
other liquid such as alcohol, can inside the coolant surge tank is
temperature.
boil before the proper coolant boiling, do not do anything else until
. Gives boiling protection up to it cools down. If coolant is visible
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine but the coolant level is not at or
warning system is set for the temperature. above the COLD mark, add a
proper coolant mixture. With plain 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water or the wrong mixture, the
. Protects against rust and
corrosion. water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
engine could get too hot but you the coolant surge tank, but be sure
would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. the cooling system is cool before
warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine this is done. See Engine
fire and you or others could be temperature. Overheating on page 9‑18 for more
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of information.
clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could The coolant surge tank is located in
DEX-COOL® coolant. the engine compartment on the
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be driver side of the vehicle. See
covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Compartment Overview on
Too much water in the mixture page 9‑6 for more information on
can freeze and crack the engine, location.
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.

Vehicle Care 9-17
How to Add Coolant to the If coolant is needed, add the proper

Coolant Surge Tank { WARNING DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
An electric engine cooling fan
{ WARNING under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
You can be burned if you spill
and can cause injury. Keep
coolant on hot engine parts.
hands, clothing, and tools away
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
from any underhood electric fan.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
The coolant surge tank pressure
coolant on a hot engine.
{ WARNING cap can be removed when the
Notice: This vehicle has a cooling system, including the surge
Steam and scalding liquids from a tank pressure cap and upper
specific coolant fill procedure.
hot cooling system can blow out radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Failure to follow this procedure
and burn you badly. They are
could cause the engine to 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
overheat and be severely under pressure, and if you turn
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
damaged. the surge tank pressure heard, wait for that to stop.
cap — even a little — they can A hiss means there is still some
come out at high speed. Never pressure left.
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank 2. Keep turning the cap and
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the remove it.
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.

9-18 Vehicle Care
time, the coolant level inside the Engine Overheating

coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add The vehicle has an indicator to warn
more of the proper mixture to the of engine overheating. There is an
coolant surge tank until the level engine coolant temperature warning
reaches the line pointed to on light on the vehicle's instrument
the front of the coolant panel. See Engine Coolant
surge tank. Temperature Gauge on page 4‑14.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Decide whether to lift the hood
Be sure the pressure cap is when this warning appears, or get
hand–tight and full seated. service help instead.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not If lifting the hood , make sure the
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with vehicle is parked on a level surface.
tightly installed, coolant loss and
the proper mixture to the COLD
possible engine damage may Then check to see if the engine
FILL line.
occur. Be sure the cap is properly cooling fans are running. If the
4. With the coolant surge tank and tightly secured. engine is overheating, both fans
pressure cap off, start the should be running. If they are not,
If coolant is needed, add the proper
engine and let it run until the do not continue to run the engine
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
upper radiator hose starts and have the vehicle serviced.
coolant surge tank.
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s). By this Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.

Vehicle Care 9-19
If Steam Is Coming From The If No Steam Is Coming From 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Engine Compartment The Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge is
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: no longer in the overheat zone or an
from the engine if you see or hear .
overheat warning no longer
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. Continue to drive the vehicle slow
the vehicle until it cools down. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
Wait until there is no sign of vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer. front. If the warning does not come
the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed back on, continue to drive normally.
with no sign of steam: If the warning continues, pull over,
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air conditioning off. stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop your temperature and to the highest If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as engine for three minutes while
of the vehicle until the engine necessary. parked. If the warning is still
is cool. displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.

9-20 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
Fluid dipstick with a clean rag.
(2.4L L4 Engine)
The power steering fluid does not 5. Replace the cap and completely
The vehicle has electric power tighten it.
steering and does not use power need to be checked unless there is
steering fluid. a leak in the system. Have the 6. Remove the cap again and look
system inspected and repaired if at the fluid level on the dipstick.
there is a fluid loss.
Power Steering Fluid The fluid level should be between
(3.0L V6 Engine) How to Check Power Steering MAX and MIN line at room
Fluid temperature. If the fluid is on or
below MIN line, add fluid.
To check:
1. Turn the engine off and let it What to Use
cool down. For the proper fluid, see
2. Remove the engine cover. Refer Recommended Fluids and
to Engine Cover on page 9‑9. Lubricants on page 10‑7.
The power steering fluid reservoir is 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
to the rear of the engine reservoir clean.
compartment on the passenger side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6.

Vehicle Care 9-21
Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes

. When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
What to Use washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
Read the manufacturer's manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched
instructions before refilling the for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
windshield washer fluid. If operating . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed.
the vehicle in an area where the The sound can come and go or be
ready-to-use washer fluid.
temperature may fall below freezing, heard all the time the vehicle is
Water can cause the solution
use a fluid that has sufficient to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the
protection against freezing. washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly.
Adding Washer Fluid parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
{ WARNING
. Fill the washer fluid tank only The brake wear warning sound
three-quarters full when it is means that soon the brakes will
very cold. This allows for not work well. That could lead to
fluid expansion if freezing an accident. When the brake
occurs, which could damage wear warning sound is heard,
Open the cap with the washer the tank if it is have the vehicle serviced.
symbol on it and add washer fluid completely full.
until full. See Engine Compartment Notice: Continuing to drive with
Overview on page 9‑6 for
. Do not use engine coolant worn-out brake pads could result
reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield in costly brake repair.
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.

9-22 Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid

can cause a brake squeal when the
Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts
necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together The brake master cylinder reservoir
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed indicated on the reservoir cap. See
specifications in Capacities and and tested with top-quality brake Engine Compartment Overview on
Specifications on page 11‑2. parts. When parts of the braking page 9‑6 for the location of the
system are replaced, be sure to get reservoir.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the
If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example, might go down:
See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
. The brake fluid level goes down
does not return to normal height, because of normal brake lining
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
pedal travel. This could be a sign installed, the fluid level goes
that brake service might be braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the back up.
required.
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.

Vehicle Care 9-23
. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low Notice:
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes
a low fluid level. Have the brake
. Using the wrong fluid can
on. See Brake System Warning badly damage brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 4‑19.
leak means that sooner or later hydraulic system parts. For
the brakes will not work well. What to Add example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
Do not top off the brake fluid. Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
If fluid is added when the linings are Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic
worn, there will be too much fluid Lubricants on page 10‑7. system parts so badly that
when new brake linings are Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
as necessary, only when work is the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic system. helps keep dirt from entering the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces,
{ WARNING the paint finish can be
If too much brake fluid is added, it
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
can spill on the engine and burn, With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
if the engine is hot enough. You brake hydraulic system, the immediately.
or others could be burned, and brakes might not work well. This
the vehicle could be damaged. could cause a crash. Always use
Add brake fluid only when work is the proper brake fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic
system.

9-24 Vehicle Care
Battery Infrequent Usage: Remove the How to Check Lubricant

black, negative (−) cable from the
Refer to the replacement number on battery to keep the battery from
the original battery label when a running down.
new battery is needed.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
{ DANGER battery or use a battery trickle
Battery posts, terminals, and charger.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals All-Wheel Drive
known to the State of California to Transfer Case
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling. When to Check and Change
Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the
Vehicle Storage Refer to the Maintenance Schedule vehicle should be on a level
to determine how often to check the surface.
{ WARNING lubricant and when to change it. If the level is below the bottom of
See Scheduled Maintenance on the filler plug hole, located on the
Batteries have acid that can burn page 10‑2. transfer case, you will need to add
you and gas that can explode. some lubricant. Add enough
You can be badly hurt if you are lubricant to raise the level to the
not careful. See Jump Starting on bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid
page 9‑69 for tips on working loss could indicate a problem; check
around a battery without and have it repaired, if needed.
getting hurt.

Vehicle Care 9-25
What to Use 3. Try to start the engine in each Be ready to apply the regular
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule gear. The vehicle should start brake immediately if the vehicle
to determine what kind of lubricant only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). begins to move.
to use. See Recommended Fluids If the vehicle starts in any other 3. With the engine off, turn the
and Lubricants on page 10‑7. position, contact your dealer for ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
service. start the engine. Without
Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission
applying the regular brake, try to
move the shift lever out of
{ WARNING Shift Lock Control P (Park) with normal effort. If the
System Check shift lever moves out of P (Park),
When you are doing this contact your dealer for service.
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
{ WARNING Ignition Transmission
moves, you or others could be When you are doing this Lock Check
injured. inspection, the vehicle could While parked, and with the parking
move suddenly. If the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to
1. Before starting this check, be moves, you or others could be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
sure there is enough room injured. position.
around the vehicle.
1. Before starting this check, be
. The ignition should turn to
2. Firmly apply both the parking
sure there is enough room LOCK/OFF only when the shift
brake and the regular brake.
around the vehicle. It should be lever is in P (Park).
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑40. parked on a level surface. . The ignition key should come
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. out only in LOCK/OFF.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off See Parking Brake on Contact your dealer if service is
the engine immediately if it page 8‑40. required.
starts.

9-26 Vehicle Care
. To check the P (Park)
Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
Front Wiper Blade
Mechanism Check Replacement
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the To replace the front wiper blades:
{ WARNING parking brake followed by the 1. Lift the wiper arm from the
regular brake. windshield until no further
When you are doing this check, movement is possible.
Contact your dealer if service is
the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear and cracking.
brake at once should the vehicle See Scheduled Maintenance on
begin to move. page 10‑2 for more information.
2. Press the square button on the
Replacement blades come in top side, at the end of the wiper
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different types and are removed in arm, and pull the wiper blade out
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways. For proper type and of the end of the wiper arm.
your foot on the regular brake, set length, see Maintenance
the parking brake. Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. 3. Install the wiper blade connector
by sliding into the end of the
. To check the parking brake's Notice: Allowing the wiper blade wiper arm until the square button
holding ability: With the engine arm to touch the windshield when on the wiper blade clicks into
running and the transmission in no wiper blade is installed could place with the wiper arm.
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot damage the windshield. Any
pressure from the regular brake damage that occurs would not be 4. Place the wiper arm with the
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is covered by your warranty. Do not wiper blade in place back on the
held by the parking brake only. allow the wiper blade arm to windshield.
touch the windshield.

Vehicle Care 9-27
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement 4. Place the wiper blade into the Headlamp Aiming
wiper arm aligning the blade
To replace the rear wiper blade: The headlamp aiming system has
attachment rivet with the arm
1. Lift the wiper arm from the attachment. been preset at the factory.
liftgate glass until no further If the vehicle is damaged in an
5. Align the wiper blade with the
movement is possible. accident, the aim of the headlamps
arm and hold both ends of the
2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip with arm while gently squeezing until may be affected and adjustment
one hand and hold the wiper the blade snaps into place. may be necessary.
blade at the tip with the It is recommended that a dealer
Do not apply excessive force
other hand. adjust the headlamps. To re-aim the
during this operation.
3. Pull down on the wiper blade. headlamps yourself, use the
Reposition the blade in the arm
The blade will pull away from following procedure.
and repeat, if blade is not
the arm. The vehicle should be properly
correctly positioned.
prepared as follows. The vehicle:
6. Place the wiper arm with the
wiper blade attached back on . Should be placed so the
the liftgate glass. headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) from
a light colored wall.
. Must have all four tires on a
level surface which is level all
the way to the wall.
. Should be placed so it is
perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.

9-28 Vehicle Care
. Should not have any snow, ice, To adjust the vertical aim, do the
or mud on it. following:
. Should be fully assembled and 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
all other work stopped while page 9‑5 for more information.
headlamp aiming is being
performed.
. Should be normally loaded with
a full tank of fuel and one person
or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the
driver's seat.
. Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the 4. At the wall measure from the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The ground upward (A) to the
high-beam headlamps will be recorded distance from
correctly aimed if the low-beam Step 3 and mark it.
headlamps are aimed properly. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of on the wall the width of the
the low‐beam headlamp. vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.

Vehicle Care 9-29
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp 9. Make sure that the light from the
flat surface. aiming screws, which are under headlamp is positioned at the
the hood near each headlamp bottom edge of the horizontal
assembly. tape line. The lamp on the
The adjustment screw can be left (A) shows the correct
turned with a E8 Torx® socket. headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw headlamp aim.
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
Turn it clockwise or the opposite headlamp.
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.

9-30 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn To replace:
For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Turn the tire to reach the access
Parking Lamps port cap located on front of
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
wheel well cover.
page 9‑34.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
A. Low Beam Headlamp

A. Screw
B. High Beam headlamp
B. Access Port Cap
C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp
2. Remove screw (A) and turn
D. Side Marker Lamp access port cap (B)
counterclockwise to remove.

Vehicle Care 9-31
3. If replacing low/high headlamp Fog Lamps 3. Remove the old bulb from the
bulb, remove the dust cover cap bulb socket and push the new
from the back of the headlamp To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight into the bulb socket
housing by turning the cap until it connects.
counterclockwise. 4. Push the bulb socket into the fog
4. Turn the bulb socket lamp assembly and turn
counterclockwise to remove from clockwise to lock it into place.
lamp assembly. 5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the
5. Remove the bulb from the electrical connector.
socket or disconnect bulb
assembly from harness
connector.
6. Install new bulb.
7. Reinstall the lamp socket to
lamp assembly turning 1. Locate the fog lamp assembly
clockwise. under the front facia.
8. Replace the dust cover cap on 2. Disconnect the bulb socket from
headlamps. the electrical connector, turn and
9. Reinstall the wheel well cover pull out the bulb assembly.
access port cap and secure by
installing screw.

9-32 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal, To replace one of these lamps: 5. Disconnect the lamp wiring
harness.
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
and Back-Up Lamps (Manual) on page 1‑8 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑8.
6. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and pull it out.
A. Sidemarker
A. Screw 7. Pull the bulb straight out of the
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/ socket.
B. Screw Cover
Taillamp
2. Remove the two screw 8. Install the new bulb.
C. Back-up Lamp
covers (B) from the taillamp 9. Push the bulb socket in and turn
assembly. it clockwise.
3. Remove the two screws (A) 10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 to
securing the taillamp assembly. reinstall lamp assembly.
4. Pull taillamp assembly out of
vehicle body.

Vehicle Care 9-33
License Plate Lamp 3. Pull the lamp assembly down to 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
remove from liftgate. the bulb socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Push the replacement bulb
1. Open the liftgate partway. See straight into the bulb socket and
Liftgate (Manual) on page 1‑8 turn the bulb socket clockwise to
or Liftgate (Power) on install into lamp assembly.
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
C. Lamp Assembly
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
Passenger side shown, driver side
counterclockwise to remove from
similar lamp assembly (C).
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.

9-34 Vehicle Care
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Engine Compartment

Bulb Fuse Block
Exterior Lamp
Number Fuses
Back-Up Lamp 921 The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by
Fog Lamp Front H11
fuses. This greatly reduces the
Headlamp chance of damage caused by
HB3
High Beam electrical problems.
Headlamp Look at the silver-colored band
H11
Low Beam inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
License Plate Lamp W5WLL
to replace a bad fuse with a new
Parking Lamp/Turn one of the identical size and rating.
T20
Signal Front
There are two fuse blocks in the
Sidemarker Front vehicle: one in the engine To remove the fuse block cover,
194 squeeze the clips on the cover and
and Rear compartment and one in the
instrument panel. lift it straight up.
Taillamp/Turn Signal
3157K There is a fuse puller located in the The vehicle may not be equipped
Lamp/Stop Lamp
engine compartment fuse block. with all of the fuses and relays
For replacement bulbs not listed See Engine Compartment Fuse shown.
here, contact your dealer. Block on page 9‑34. It can be used Notice: Spilling liquid on any
to easily remove fuses from the fuse electrical components on the
block. vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

Vehicle Care 9-35
J-Case Usage
Fuses
6 Power Seat – Left
Instrument Panel
7
Fuse Block 1
Instrument Panel
8
Fuse Block 2
9 Starter
10 Brake Booster
11 Sunroof
Antilock Brake
12
System Pump
Instrument Panel
Engine Compartment Fuse Block 13
Fuse Block 3
Power Windows
J-Case Usage J-Case Usage 14
– Left
Fuses Fuses
Antilock Brake
1 Cool Fan 1 Power Windows – 15
4 System Module
Right
2 Cool Fan 2
Memory Seat
3 Rear Defog 5
Module

9-36 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Transmission 28 Wiper Pre–Catalytic
16 Control Module 41 Converter Oxygen
29 Rear Wiper
Battery Sensor
Air Conditioning
17 Trailer Parking Light 30 Transmission
Compressor 42
Control Module
Engine Control
18 31 Rear Latch
Module Battery 43 Mirror
32 Horn
19 Heated Mirror Chassis Control
44
Right High‐Beam Module Ignition
20 Trailer Left 33
Headlamp
45 Spare
21 Lift Gate Module
Left High‐Beam
34 46 Rear Drive Module
22 Power Lumbar Headlamp
Lift Gate Module
23 Trailer Right 35 Ignition Even Coil 47
Logic
24 Canister Vent 36 Ignition Odd Coil
Instrument Panel
48
Memory Mirror 37 Windshield Washer Fuse Block Ignition
25
Module
38 Front Fog Lamps 49 Heated Seat – Front
Regulated Voltage
Post Catalytic Chassis Control
26 Control Battery 50
39 Converter Oxygen Module
Sensor
Sensor
Engine Control
Rear Accessory 51
27 Engine Control Module
Power Outlet 40
Module
52 Rear Vision Camera

Vehicle Care 9-37
Midi Fuse Usage Mini Relays Usage To reinstall the door, insert the tabs
on the bottom of the door into the
Electric Power 65 Cooling Fan High console first, then push the door
53
Steering back into its original location.
66 Brake Booster
The vehicle may not be equipped
Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse with all of the fuses and relays
Relays shown.
Block
54 Rear Defogger
55 Cooling Fan Low
Head Lamp
56
High Beam
57 Cooling Fan Control
Wiper On/Off
58
Control
Air Conditioning
59
Compressor
60 Wiper Speed
61 Fog Lamp The instrument panel fuse block
62 Engine Control is located on the passenger
side panel of the center console.
63 Starter To access the fuses, open the fuse
64 Run/Crank panel door from the passenger side
by pulling it out.

9-38 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage

Body Control
6
Module 7
Noise Control
7
Module
Body Control
8
Module 4
9 Radio
10 SEO Battery
Ultrasonic Rear
11
Parking Aid Module
Heater, Ventilation
12 and Air Conditioning
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Battery
Auxiliary Power
13
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Front
1 Steering Wheel DM Body Control Heater, Ventilation
4 14 and Air Conditioning
Module 1
2 Spare Ignition
5 Infotainment
3 Spare

Vehicle Care 9-39
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage

Fuses
15 Display Body Control
30
Module 3 29 Front Blower Motor
Body Control
16
Module 5 31 Amplifier Body Control
40
Module 8
Auxiliary Discrete Logic
17 32
Power Rear Ignition Switch
Relays Usage
Instrument Panel Communications
18 33 41 LOG Relay
Cluster Ignition Integration Module
19 PDI Module Body Control Retained Accessory
34 42
Module 2 Power Relay
Body Control
20
Module 6 35 SDM Battery
SEO Retained Data Link
21 36
Accessory Power Connection
22 SDM Ignition Instrument Panel
37
Cluster Battery
23 Spare
IOS Module
24 Spare
38 (Passenger Sensing
25 PRNDL System)
26 Spare 39 Spare
27 Spare
28 Spare

9-40 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued)

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
Tires . Underinflated tires pose the molded into its sidewall. The
same danger as overloaded examples below show a typical
Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting accident
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury.
passenger vehicle tire and a
leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to compact spare tire sidewall.
ever have questions about your maintain the recommended
tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure
obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when your
Warranty booklet for details. For tires are cold. See Tire
additional information refer to Pressure on page 9‑46.
the tire manufacturer. . Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
{ WARNING or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
Poorly maintained and improperly hit a pothole. Keep tires at
used tires are dangerous. the recommended pressure.
. Overloading your tires can
. Worn, old tires can cause
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
cause overheating as a result accidents. If your tread is
of too much flexing. You badly worn, or if your tires (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
could have an air-out and a have been damaged, combination of letters and
serious accident. See Vehicle replace them. numbers used to define a
Load Limits on page 8‑24. particular tire's width, height,
(Continued) aspect ratio, construction type,

Vehicle Care 9-41
and service description. See the Tire Identification Number (TIN).

“Tire Size” illustration later in this The TIN shows the
section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code,
(B) TPC Spec (Tire tire size, and date the tire was
Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
Specification): Original molded onto both sides of the
equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread.
exceed all federal safety Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire (A) Tire Ply Material: The type
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
Transportation): The grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear, (B) Temporary Use Only: The
(DOT) code indicates that the traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
tire is in compliance with the resistance. For more information use tire has a tread life of
U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality approximately 5 000 km
Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 9‑56 . (3,000 miles) and should not be
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that (65 mph). The compact spare
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the tire is for emergency use when a
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to regular road tire has lost air and
of Transportation) code is the support that load. gone flat. If your vehicle has a

9-42 Vehicle Care
compact spare tire, see (E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations
Compact Spare Tire on temporary use tire or compact
page 9‑68 and If a Tire Goes Flat spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size
on page 9‑59 . 420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following illustration shows
(C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and an example of a typical
(TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Tire Pressure on passenger vehicle tire size.
following the DOT (Department page 9‑46 .
of Transportation) code is the (F) Tire Size : A combination of
Tire Identification Number (TIN). letters and numbers define a
The TIN shows the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
manufacturer and plant code, construction type, and service
tire size, and date the tire was description. The letter T as the
manufactured. The TIN is first character in the tire size (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
molded onto both sides of the means the tire is for temporary The United States version of a
tire, although only one side may use only. metric tire sizing system. The
have the date of manufacture. (G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger
Load Limit: Maximum load that Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to
can be carried and the equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire
maximum pressure needed to GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association.
support that load. criteria have a TPC specification (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
code molded onto the sidewall. number indicates the tire section
GM's TPC specifications meet or width in millimeters from
exceed all federal safety sidewall to sidewall.
guidelines.

Vehicle Care 9-43
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit certified to carry. The speed Belt: A rubber coated layer of
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a cords that is located between
height‐to‐width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. the plies and the tread. Cords
For example, if the tire size may be made from steel or other
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and reinforcing materials.
item C of the illustration, it would Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains
mean that the tire's sidewall is steel wires wrapped by steel
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto
(D) Construction Code: A outward on each square inch of the rim.
letter code is used to indicate the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
the type of ply construction in expressed in psi (pounds per in which the plies are laid at
the tire. The letter R means square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). alternate angles less than
radial ply construction; the 90 degrees to the centerline of
letter D means diagonal or bias Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight of the tread.
ply construction; and the letter B
means belted‐bias ply optional accessories. Some Cold Tire Pressure: The
construction. examples of optional amount of air pressure in a tire,
accessories are, automatic measured in psi (pounds per
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of transmission, power steering, square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
the wheel in inches. power brakes, power windows, before a tire has built up heat
(F) Service Description: These power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
characters represent the load conditioning. on page 9‑46 .
index and speed rating of the Aspect Ratio: The relationship
tire. The load index represents of a tire's height to its width.
the load carry capacity a tire is

9-44 Vehicle Care
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 8‑24 . The maximum air pressure is
and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall.
passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The
DOT Markings: A code molded Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the
into the sidewall of a tire page 8‑24 . maximum permissible inflation
signifying that the tire is in Intended Outboard Sidewall : pressure for that tire.
compliance with the U.S. The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Department of Transportation that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb
(DOT) motor vehicle safety when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight,
standards. The DOT code vehicle capacity weight, and
includes the Tire Identification Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure. production options weight.
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A Normal Occupant Weight: The
identify the tire manufacturer, tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
production plant, brand, and some multipurpose passenger is designed to seat multiplied by
date of production. vehicles. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 .
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Load Index: An assigned
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution :
on page 8‑24 . that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
carrying capacity of a tire.

Vehicle Care 9-45
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains.
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 9‑53 .
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
model name molding that is Grading Standards): A tire
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides
moldings on the other sidewall consumers with ratings for a
of the tire. Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature,
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A alphanumeric code assigned to and treadwear. Ratings are
tire used on passenger cars and a tire indicating the maximum determined by tire
some light duty trucks and speed at which a tire can manufacturers using
multipurpose vehicles. operate. government testing procedures.
Recommended Inflation Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the
Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
manufacturer's recommended The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on
tire inflation pressure as shown page 9‑56 .
Tread: The portion of a tire that
on the tire placard. See Tire comes into contact with
Pressure on page 9‑46 and the road.
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .

9-46 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air
number of designated seating (over‐inflation), you can get
positions multiplied by 68 kg Tires need the correct amount of the following:
(150 lbs) plus the rated cargo air pressure to operate
effectively. . Unusual wear
load. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 . Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling
Vehicle Maximum Load on the you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride
Tire: Load on an individual tire over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
. Needless damage from
due to curb weight, accessory road hazards
weight, occupant weight, and enough air (under‐inflation),
cargo weight. you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and
. Too much flexing Loading Information label is
Vehicle Placard: A label attached to your vehicle. This
permanently attached to a . Too much heat label shows your vehicle's
vehicle showing the vehicle's . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the
capacity weight and the original correct inflation pressures for
equipment tire size and . Premature or your tires when they are cold.
recommended inflation pressure. irregular wear The recommended cold tire
See “Tire and Loading . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the
Information Label” under Vehicle label, is the minimum amount of
Load Limits on page 8‑24 .
. Reduced fuel economy
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.

Vehicle Care 9-47
For additional information How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air
regarding how much weight your Use a good quality pocket-type by pushing on the metal stem in
vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. the center of the tire valve.
example of the Tire and Loading You cannot tell if your tires are Re‐check the tire pressure with
Information label, see Vehicle properly inflated simply by the tire gauge.
Load Limits on page 8‑24 . How looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps
you load your vehicle affects look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They
vehicle handling and ride they are under‐inflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping
comfort. Never load your vehicle the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture.
with more weight than it was the tires are cold. Cold means
designed to carry. your vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure Monitor
When to Check at least three hours or driven no System
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Check your tires once a month The Tire Pressure Monitor System
or more. Do not forget to check Remove the valve cap from the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
the compact spare tire, if the tire valve stem. Press the tire technology to check tire pressure
vehicle has one. The compact gauge firmly onto the valve to levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
spare should be at 60 psi get a pressure measurement. the air pressure in your vehicle's
If the cold tire inflation pressure tires and transmit tire pressure
(420 kPa). For additional
matches the recommended readings to a receiver located in the
information regarding the vehicle.
compact spare tire, see pressure on the Tire and
Compact Spare Tire on Loading Information label, no Each tire, including the spare (if
further adjustment is necessary. provided), should be checked
page 9‑68 .
If the inflation pressure is low, monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
add air until you reach the by the vehicle manufacturer on the
recommended amount. vehicle placard or tire inflation

9-48 Vehicle Care
pressure label. (If your vehicle has Please note that the TPMS is not a wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or maintenance, and it is the driver's Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire pressure, even if under‐inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or
As an added safety feature, your illumination of the TPMS low tire alternate tires and wheels allow the
vehicle has been equipped with a pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
tire pressure monitoring system Your vehicle has also been properly.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire equipped with a TPMS malfunction See Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure telltale when one or indicator to indicate when the Operation on page 9‑49 for
more of your tires is significantly system is not operating properly. additional information.
under‐inflated. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure Federal Communications
Accordingly, when the low tire Commission (FCC) and
pressure telltale illuminates, you telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Industry Canada
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them approximately one minute and then See Radio Frequency Statement on
to the proper pressure. Driving on a remain continuously illuminated. page 12‑16 for information regarding
significantly under‐inflated tire This sequence will continue upon Part 15 of the Federal
causes the tire to overheat and can subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Communications Commission (FCC)
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation long as the malfunction exists. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire When the malfunction indicator is Canada.
tread life, and may affect the illuminated, the system may not be
vehicle's handling and stopping able to detect or signal low tire
ability. pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or

Vehicle Care 9-49
Tire Pressure Monitor inflate the tires to the recommended A Tire and Loading Information
pressure shown on the tire loading label, attached to your vehicle,
Operation information label. See Vehicle Load shows the size of your vehicle's
This vehicle may have a Tire Limits on page 8‑24. original equipment tires and the
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). At the same time a message to correct inflation pressure for your
The TPMS is designed to warn the check the pressure in a specific tire vehicle's tires when they are cold.
driver when a low tire pressure appears on the Driver Information See Vehicle Load Limits on
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Center (DIC) display. The low tire page 8‑24, for an example of the
mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure warning light and the DIC Tire and Loading Information label
assembly, excluding the spare tire warning message come on at each and its location on your vehicle.
and wheel assembly. The TPMS ignition cycle until the tires are Also see Tire Pressure on
sensors monitor the air pressure in inflated to the correct inflation page 9‑46.
the vehicle's tires and transmits the pressure. Using the DIC, tire Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
tire pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed by about a low tire pressure condition
located in the vehicle. the driver. For additional information but it does not replace normal tire
and details about the DIC operation maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and displays see Driver Information on page 9‑52, Tire Rotation on
Center (DIC) on page 4‑24. page 9‑52 and Tires on page 9‑40.
The low tire pressure warning light Notice: Liquid tire sealants could
may come on in cool weather when damage the Tire Pressure Monitor
the vehicle is first started, and then System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
When a low tire pressure condition turn off as you start to drive. This damage caused by using a tire
is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the sealant is not covered by your
the low tire pressure warning light air pressure in the tire(s) are getting warranty. Do not use liquid tire
located on the instrument panel low and need to be inflated to the sealants.
cluster. If the warning light comes proper pressure.
on, stop as soon as possible and

9-50 Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or
Message process was started but not being near facilities using radio
completed or not completed wave frequencies similar to the
The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the TPMS could cause the TPMS
if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message sensors to malfunction.
are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light
system detects a malfunction, the If the TPMS is not functioning it
should go off once the TPMS cannot detect or signal a low tire
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is
about one minute and then stays on condition. See your dealer for
performed successfully. See service if the TPMS malfunction
for the remainder of the ignition “TPMS Sensor Matching
cycle. A DIC warning message is light and DIC message comes on
Process” later in this section. and stays on.
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
. One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
come on at each ignition cycle until Process
the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS
the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are identification code. Any time you
to come on are: installed and the sensor rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
matching process is performed one or more of the TPMS sensors,
. One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer for the identification codes will need to
replaced with the spare tire. The service. be matched to the new tire/wheel
spare tire does not have a position. The sensors are matched
TPMS sensor. The TPMS
. Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original to the tire/wheel positions in the
malfunction light and DIC following order: driver side front tire,
message should go off once you equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those passenger side front tire, passenger
re‐install the road tire containing side rear tire, and driver side rear
the TPMS sensor. recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
functioning properly. See Buying See your dealer for service.
New Tires on page 9‑54.

Vehicle Care 9-51
The TPMS sensors can also be The TPMS sensor matching process 6. Start with the driver side
matched to each tire/wheel position is outlined below: front tire.
by increasing or decreasing the 1. Set the parking brake. 7. Remove the valve cap from the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the valve cap stem. Activate the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off. TPMS sensor by increasing or
the maximum inflation pressure decreasing the tire's air pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall. 3. Use the MENU button to select for five seconds, or until a horn
To decrease air-pressure out of a the Vehicle Information Menu in chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
tire you can use the pointed end of the Driver Information Center which may take up to
the valve cap, a pencil-style air (DIC). Use the arrow keys to 30 seconds to sound, confirms
pressure gage, or a key. scroll to the Tire Pressure that the sensor identification
screen. code has been matched to this
You have two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and 4. Press the SET/CLR button to tire and wheel position.
five minutes overall to match all four begin the sensor matching 8. Proceed to the passenger side
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer process. front tire, and repeat the
than two minutes, to match the first A message asking if you are procedure in Step 7.
tire and wheel, or more than sure you want to begin this 9. Proceed to the passenger side
five minutes to match all four tire process should appear. rear tire, and repeat the
and wheel positions the matching procedure in Step 7.
process stops and you need to 5. Press the SET/CLR button again
start over. to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the Tire Learning Active
message displays on the DIC
screen.

9-52 Vehicle Care
10. Proceed to the driver side rear of wear or damage. See When
tire, and repeat the procedure It Is Time for New Tires on
in Step 7. The horn sounds two page 9‑53 for more information.
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been Tire Rotation
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor Tires should be rotated every
matching process is no longer 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to
active. The Tire Learning 8,000 miles). See Scheduled
Active message on the DIC Maintenance on page 10‑2 .
display screen goes off.
The purpose of a regular tire
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
rotation is to achieve a uniform When rotating the vehicle's tires,
12. Set all four tires to the wear for all tires on the vehicle.
recommended air pressure always use the correct rotation
This will ensure that the vehicle pattern shown here.
level as indicated on the Tire continues to perform most like it
and Loading Information label. Do not include the compact
did when the tires were new.
13. Put the valve caps back on the spare tire in the tire rotation.
valve stems. Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as After the tires have been
possible and check wheel rotated, adjust the front and rear
Tire Inspection inflation pressures as shown on
alignment. Also check for
We recommend that you damaged tires or wheels. See the Tire and Loading Information
regularly inspect your vehicle's When It Is Time for New Tires label. See Tire Pressure on
tires, including the spare tire, on page 9‑53 and Wheel page 9‑46 and Vehicle Load
if the vehicle has one, for signs Replacement on page 9‑57 . Limits on page 8‑24 .

Vehicle Care 9-53
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any
System. See Tire Pressure of the following statements are true:
Tires
Monitor Operation on page 9‑49 . . You can see the indicators at
Various factors, such as three or more places around
Make certain that all wheel nuts maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire.
are properly tightened. See speeds, vehicle loading, and road
“Wheel Nut Torque” under conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric
Capacities and Specifications on new tires. showing through the tire's
page 11‑2 . rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked,
{ WARNING cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the . The tire has a bump, bulge,
parts to which it is fastened, can or split.
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
off and cause an accident. When or other damage that cannot be
changing a wheel, remove any repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In The rubber in tires degrades over
an emergency, use a cloth or a time. This is also true for the spare
paper towel to do this; but be sure One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it
to use a scraper or wire brush new tires is to check the treadwear is not being used. Multiple
indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this aging
later, if needed, to get all the rust
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or takes place, including temperatures,
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
less of tread remaining. loading conditions, and inflation
on page 9‑59.
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically

9-54 Vehicle Care
wear out before they degrade due to GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 9‑52
age. If you are unsure about the system considers over a dozen and Tire Rotation on page 9‑52
need to replace the tires as they get critical specifications that impact for information on proper tire
older, consult the tire manufacturer the overall performance of your rotation.
vehicle, including brake system
Buying New Tires performance, ride and handling, { WARNING
traction control, and tire
GM has developed and matched pressure monitoring Mixing tires could cause you
specific tires for your vehicle. performance. GM's TPC Spec to lose control while driving.
The original equipment tires number is molded onto the tire's If you mix tires of different
installed on your vehicle, when it sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types (radial
was new, were designed to meet tires have an all‐season tread and bias-belted tires), the
General Motors Tire design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle
Performance Criteria will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have
Specification (TPC Spec) mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different
system rating. If you need Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑40 sizes, brands, or types may
replacement tires, GM strongly for additional information. also cause damage to your
recommends that you get tires vehicle. Be sure to use the
GM recommends replacing tires correct size, brand, and type
with the same TPC Spec rating. in sets of four. This is because
This way, your vehicle will of tires on all wheels. It is all
uniform tread depth on all tires right to drive with your
continue to have tires that are will help keep your vehicle
designed to give the same compact spare temporarily, as
performing most like it did when it was developed for use on
performance and vehicle safety, the tires were new. Replacing
during normal use, as the your vehicle. See Compact
less than a full set of tires can Spare Tire on page 9‑68 .
original tires. affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
Vehicle Care 9-55
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may Additionally, if your vehicle has

{ WARNING give a low‐pressure warning that electronic systems such as anti‐lock
is higher or lower than the brakes, rollover airbags, traction
If you use bias-ply tires on the control, and electronic stability
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges proper warning level you would
control, the performance of these
could develop cracks after get with TPC Spec rated tires.
systems can be affected.
many miles of driving. A tire See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 9‑47 .
and/or wheel could fail { WARNING
suddenly, causing a crash. Your vehicle's original
Use only radial-ply tires with equipment tires are listed on the If you add different sized wheels,
the wheels on the vehicle. Tire and Loading Information your vehicle may not provide an
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits acceptable level of performance
If you must replace your on page 8‑24 , for more and safety if tires not
vehicle's tires with those that do information about the Tire and recommended for those wheels
not have a TPC Spec number, are selected. You may increase
Loading Information Label and
make sure they are the same the chance that you will crash and
its location on your vehicle.
size, load range, speed rating, suffer serious injury. Only use GM
and construction type (radial and specific wheel and tire systems
Different Size Tires and developed for your vehicle, and
bias‐belted tires) as your Wheels have them properly installed by a
vehicle's original tires.
If you add wheels or tires that are a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire different size than your original
pressure monitoring system equipment wheels and tires, this See Buying New Tires on
could give an inaccurate could affect the way your vehicle page 9‑54 and Accessories and
low‐pressure warning if performs, including its braking, ride Modifications on page 9‑4 for
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are and handling characteristics, additional information.
installed on your vehicle. stability, and resistance to rollover.

9-56 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality (UTQG) system does not apply Treadwear

Grading to deep tread, winter-type snow The treadwear grade is a
tires, space-saver, or temporary comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found use spare tires, tires with
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
nominal rim diameters of under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
and maximum section width. For specified government test
or to some limited-production course. For example, a tire
example: tires. graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A General Motors passenger cars government course as a tire
The following information relates and light trucks may vary with graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the respect to these grades, they performance of tires depends
United States National Highway must also conform to federal upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration safety requirements and their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires by additional General Motors Tire depart significantly from the
treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) norm due to variations in
temperature performance. This standards. driving habits, service practices
applies only to vehicles sold in All Passenger Car Tires Must and differences in road
the United States. The grades Conform to Federal Safety characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of Requirements In Addition To
most passenger car tires. The These Grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Vehicle Care 9-57
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire

The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels on the vehicle
and C. Those grades represent were aligned and balanced carefully
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
at the factory to give the longest tire
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead life and best overall performance.
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade Adjustments to wheel alignment and
specified government test C corresponds to a level of tire balancing will not be necessary
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all on a regular basis. However, if there
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety pulls to one side or the other, the
Standard No. 109. Grades B and alignment should be checked.
Warning: The traction grade If the vehicle vibrates when driving
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory on a smooth road, the tires and
straight-ahead braking traction wheels might need to be
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
rebalanced. See your dealer for
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The proper diagnosis.
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
characteristics. established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement
properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed, Replace any wheel that is bent,
underinflation, or excessive cracked, or badly rusted or
The temperature grades are A corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced.
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it
ability to dissipate heat when (except some aluminum wheels,
tested under controlled
9-58 Vehicle Care
which can sometimes be repaired). Used Replacement Wheels

See your dealer if any of these WARNING (Continued)
conditions exist.
dangerous. It could affect the { WARNING
Your dealer will know the kind of braking and handling of your
wheel you need. Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle, make your tires lose air
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
Each new wheel should have the and make you lose control. You
know how it has been used or
same load-carrying capacity, could have a collision in which
how far it has been driven.
diameter, width, offset, and be you or others could be injured.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
mounted the same way as the one it Always use the correct wheel,
replaces. crash. If you have to replace a
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
wheel, use a new GM original
If you need to replace any of the replacement.
equipment wheel.
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System Notice: The wrong wheel can
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only also cause problems with bearing Tire Chains
with new GM original equipment life, brake cooling, speedometer
parts. This way, you will be sure to or odometer calibration, { WARNING
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, headlamp aim, bumper height,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for vehicle ground clearance, and tire Do not use tire chains. There is
the vehicle. or tire chain clearance to the not enough clearance. Tire chains
body and chassis. used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
{ WARNING See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑59 for more information. cause damage to the brakes,
Using the wrong replacement suspension or other vehicle parts.
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel The area damaged by the tire
nuts on your vehicle can be (Continued)
(Continued)

Vehicle Care 9-59
WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
It is unusual for a tire to blowout stop, well off the road if possible.
chains could cause you to lose while you are driving, especially if
control of the vehicle and you or you maintain your vehicle's tires
others may be injured in a crash. properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is { WARNING
Use another type of traction much more likely to leak out slowly. Lifting a vehicle and getting under
But if you should ever have a it to do maintenance or repairs is
device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about
recommends it for use on the dangerous without the
what to expect and what to do:
vehicle and tire size combination appropriate safety equipment and
and road conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire training. If a jack is provided with
manufacturer's instructions. To creates a drag that pulls the vehicle the vehicle, it is designed only for
help avoid damage to the vehicle, toward that side. Take your foot off changing a flat tire. If it is used for
drive slowly, readjust or remove the accelerator pedal and grip the anything else, you or others could
the device if it is contacting the steering wheel firmly. Steer to be badly injured or killed if the
maintain lane position, and then vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
vehicle, and do not spin the
gently brake to a stop well out of the is provided with the vehicle, only
vehicle's wheels. If you do find
traffic lane.
traction devices that will fit, install use it for changing a flat tire.
them on the front tires. A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may

9-60 Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a
to a level place. Turn on the hazard guide to assist you in the placement
warning flashers. See Hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do of wheel blocks (A).
Warning Flashers on page 5‑2. not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
{ WARNING 4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip To be certain the vehicle will not
off the jack and roll over or fall on move, put blocks at the front and
you or other people. You and they rear of the tire farthest away from
could be badly injured or even the one being changed. That
killed. Find a level place to would be the tire on the other
change your tire. To help prevent side, at the opposite end of the
the vehicle from moving: vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly. A. Wheel Block
2. Put an automatic B. Flat Tire
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual The following information explains
transmission to 1 (First) or how to repair or change a tire.
R (Reverse).
(Continued)

Vehicle Care 9-61
Tire Changing Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools 1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
To access the spare tire and tools: Flat on page 9‑59 for more
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate information.
(Manual) on page 1‑8 or 2. For vehicles with wheel nut
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑8. caps, turn the wheel wrench
2. Lift the load floor up. counterclockwise to loosen and
remove them.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
4. Turn the retainer nut from the cover or center cap.
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire. 3. For vehicles with a wheel cover
or center cap, pull the cover or
5. Place the spare tire next to the center cap away from the wheel
tire being changed. to remove it. Store the wheel
cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
3. Remove the extension (A),

wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).
Place the tools next to the tire
being changed.

9-62 Vehicle Care
6. Position the jack lift head at the

jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a
mark on the bottom edge of the
front and rear door plastic
molding. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
4. Turn the wheel wrench Front

counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle. Place the jack notch (A) under
The repairs would not be covered the frame rail seam (B).
by your warranty.
7. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
Rear

Vehicle Care 9-63
{ WARNING { WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is Lifting a vehicle and getting under
jacked up is dangerous. If the it to do maintenance or repairs is
vehicle slips off the jack, you dangerous without the
could be badly injured or killed. appropriate safety equipment and
Never get under a vehicle when it training. If a jack is provided with
is supported only by a jack. the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
{ WARNING be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 8. Fit the jack handle extension
Raising your vehicle with the jack is provided with the vehicle, only onto the jack by sliding the hook
improperly positioned can use it for changing a flat tire. through the end of the jack.
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.

9-64 Vehicle Care
9. Insert the other end of the jack 10. Place the jack under the 11. Raise the vehicle by turning the
handle into the wrench. vehicle. jack handle clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear
the ground.

Vehicle Care 9-65
15. Place the compact spare tire

WARNING (Continued) on the wheel-mounting surface.
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush { WARNING
later, if needed, to get all the rust Never use oil or grease on bolts
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat or nuts because the nuts might
on page 9‑59. come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
16. Reinstall the wheel nuts.

Tighten each nut by hand until
12. Remove all of the wheel nuts. the wheel is held against
the hub.
13. Remove the flat tire.
17. Lower the vehicle by
{ WARNING turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When 14. Remove any rust or dirt from
changing a wheel, remove any the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
(Continued)

9-66 Vehicle Care
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit

{ WARNING on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
Wheel nuts that are improperly or the compact spare, the cover or
incorrectly tightened can cause the spare could be damaged.
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
be tightened with a torque wrench and Tools
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque { WARNING
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when Storing a jack, a tire, or other
using accessory locking wheel 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in equipment in the passenger
nuts. See Capacities and a crisscross sequence, as compartment of the vehicle could
Specifications on page 11‑2 for shown. cause injury. In a sudden stop or
original equipment wheel nut collision, loose equipment could
19. Lower the jack all the way and strike someone. Store all these in
torque specifications.
remove the jack from under the the proper place.
Notice: Improperly tightened vehicle.
wheel nuts can lead to brake 20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
pulsation and rotor damage. To with the wheel wrench.
avoid expensive brake repairs, When reinstalling the wheel cover or
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in center cap on the full-size tire,
the proper sequence and to the tighten all five plastic caps hand
proper torque specification. See snug with the aid of the wheel
Capacities and Specifications on wrench and tighten them with the
page 11‑2 for the wheel nut wheel wrench an additional one‐
torque specification. quarter of a turn.

Vehicle Care 9-67
To store the flat tire:
4. Pull the cable (A) through the 5. Hook the cable onto the outside
door striker (D) then the center portion of the liftgate hinges (B).
1. Remove the cable package. The of the wheel (C). 6. Hook the other end of the cable
cable is stored in a plastic bag onto the outside portion of the
under the compact spare tire. liftgate hinge on the other side of
2. Remove the small center cap by the vehicle.
tapping the back of the cap with 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it
the extension of the shaft, if the is secure.
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear
storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.

9-68 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire tire repaired or replaced at your

convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
{ WARNING as soon as possible. The spare tire
Driving with more than one will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare
handling. This could lead to a is installed, do not take the
crash and you or others could be vehicle through an automatic car
injured. Use only one compact wash with guide rails. The
spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
8. Make sure the metal tube is If this vehicle has a compact spare tire, wheel and other parts of the
centered at the striker. Push the tire it was fully inflated when the vehicle.
tube toward the front of the vehicle was new, however, it can Do not use the compact spare on
vehicle. lose air after a time. Check the other vehicles.
9. Close the liftgate and make sure inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi). Do not mix the compact spare tire or
it is latched properly.
wheel with other wheels or tires.
The compact spare is for temporary After installing the compact spare They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
use only. Replace the compact on the vehicle, stop as soon as and its wheel together.
spare tire with a full-size tire as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
soon as you can.
compact spare is made to perform compact spare. Using them can
well at speeds up to 105 km/h damage the vehicle and can
(65 mph) for distances up to damage the chains too. Do not
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can use tire chains on the compact
finish your trip and have the full-size spare.

Vehicle Care 9-69
Jump Starting { WARNING

Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely. Ignoring these steps
Jump starting can be used on could result in costly damage to the
vehicles with run‐down batteries by Using an open flame near a vehicle that would not be covered
using jumper cables and another battery can cause battery gas to by the warranty.
vehicle. explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not work,
{ WARNING blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light. and it could damage the vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can Notice: If you leave the radio or
Be sure the battery has enough
be dangerous because: other accessories on during the
water. You do not need to add
jump starting procedure, they
. They contain acid that can water to the battery installed in could be damaged. The repairs
burn you. your new vehicle. But if a battery would not be covered by the
. They contain gas that can has filler caps, be sure the right warranty. Always turn off the
explode or ignite. amount of fluid is there. If it is low, radio and other accessories when
add water to take care of that jump starting the vehicle.
. They contain enough first. If you do not, explosive gas
electricity to burn you. could be present. Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
If you do not follow these steps Battery fluid contains acid that wrong order, electrical shorting
exactly, some or all of these can burn you. Do not get it on may occur and damage the
things can hurt you. you. If you accidentally get it in vehicle. The repairs would not be
your eyes or on your skin, flush covered by the vehicle warranty.
the place with water and get Always connect and remove the
medical help immediately. jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.

9-70 Vehicle Care
1. The vehicle used to jump start 4. Locate the positive (+) and 5. The remote positive (+)
must have 12-volt battery with a negative (−) terminals on both terminal (A) is located on the
negative ground. vehicles. Some vehicles have underhood fuse block, on the
Notice: If the other vehicle's remote jump starting terminals. driver side. Lift the red cap to
system is not a 12-volt system uncover the terminal.
with a negative ground, both The remote negative (−)
vehicles can be damaged. Only terminal (B) is a stud behind the
use vehicles with 12-volt systems metal tab stamped with GND (−)
with negative grounds to jump near the driver side strut tower.
start your vehicle. 6. The jumper cables should be in
2. The vehicles should be close good working condition with no
enough for the jumper cables to loose or missing insulation. The
reach, but the vehicles should vehicles could be damaged if
not be touching. Touching could they are not.
cause grounding and possible 7. Connect the red positive (+)
electrical system damage. cable to the positive (+) terminal
Put both vehicles in P (Park) on the vehicle with the dead
and set the parking brake firmly. { WARNING battery. Use a remote
3. Unplug accessories plugged into An electric fan can start up even positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
the cigarette lighter or the has one.
when the engine is not running
accessory power outlet. Turn off and can injure you. Keep hands,
the radio and all lamps that are clothing and tools away from any
not needed. Turn off the ignition underhood electric fan.
on both vehicles.

Vehicle Care 9-71
8. Do not let the other end touch 11. Start the vehicle with the good
metal. Connect it to the battery and run the engine.
positive (+) terminal of the good 12. Press the unlock symbol on the
battery. Use a remote remote keyless entry
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle transmitter to disarm the
has one. security system, if equipped.
9. Connect the black negative (−) 13. Try to start the vehicle that had
cable to the negative (−) terminal the dead battery. If it will not
of the good battery. Use a start after a few tries, it needs
remote negative (−) terminal if service.
the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
Do not let the other end touch connected or removed in the Jumper Cable Removal
anything until the next step. The wrong order, electrical shorting
other end of the negative (−) A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
may occur and damage the
cable does not go to the dead Part or Remote Negative (−)
vehicle. The repairs would not be
battery. It goes to a heavy, Terminal
covered by the vehicle warranty.
unpainted metal engine part or Always connect and remove the B. Good Battery or Remote
to a remote negative (−) terminal jumper cables in the correct Positive (+) and Remote
on the vehicle with the dead order, making sure that the Negative (−) Terminals
battery. cables do not touch each other or C. Dead Battery or Remote
10. Connect the other end of the other metal. Positive (+) Terminal
negative (−) cable away from
the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move.

9-72 Vehicle Care
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing dolly towing. Dinghy towing is

from both vehicles, towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle is towing the vehicle with two
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead To avoid damage, the disabled wheels on the ground and two
battery. vehicle should be towed with all four wheels up on a device known as a
wheels off the ground. Consult your dolly.
2. Disconnect the black dealer or a professional towing
negative (−) cable from the Here are some important things to
service if the disabled vehicle must consider before recreational vehicle
vehicle with the good battery. be towed. See Roadside Assistance towing:
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) Program on page 12‑6.
cable from the vehicle with the
. What is the towing capacity of
To tow the vehicle behind the towing vehicle? Be sure to
good battery. another vehicle for recreational read the tow vehicle
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) purposes — such as behind a manufacturer's
cable from the other vehicle. motorhome, see Recreational recommendations.
Vehicle Towing following.
5. Return the underhood fuse block . What is the distance that will be
cover to its original position, travelled? Some vehicles have
if applicable. Recreational Vehicle restrictions on how far and how
Towing long they can tow.
Recreational vehicle towing means . Is the proper towing equipment
towing the vehicle behind another going to be used? See your
vehicle – such as behind a dealer or trailering professional
motorhome. The two most common for additional advice and
types of recreational vehicle towing equipment recommendations.
are known as dinghy towing and

Vehicle Care 9-73
. Is the vehicle ready to be 5. To prevent the battery from
towed? Just as preparing the draining while the vehicle is
vehicle for a long trip, make sure being towed, remove fuse 32,
the vehicle is prepared to be the Discrete Logic Ignition
towed. Switch fuse, from the instrument
Dinghy Towing panel fuse block and store it in a
safe location. See Instrument
Front-wheel‐drive and Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑37.
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
dinghy towed from the front. These Notice: If the vehicle is towed
vehicles can also be towed by without performing each of the
placing them on a platform trailer steps listed under “Dinghy
with all four wheels off of the Towing,” the automatic
To tow the vehicle from the front transmission could be damaged.
ground. For other towing options,
with all four wheels on the ground: Be sure to follow all steps of the
see “Dolly Towing” following in this
section. 1. Position the vehicle that will be dinghy towing procedure prior to
towed and secure it to the and after towing the vehicle.
For vehicles being dinghy towed,
towing vehicle. Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each 2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ exceeded while towing the
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. ACCESSORY. vehicle, it could be damaged.
This will ensure proper lubrication of Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
3. Shift the transmission to while towing the vehicle.
transmission components. N (Neutral).
4. Turn all accessories off.

9-74 Vehicle Care
Once the destination has been Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with Dolly Towing
reached: the front drive wheels on the (Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
1. Set the parking brake. ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
2. Shift the transmission to two different tire sizes on the
P (Park). front of the vehicle can cause
3. Turn the ignition key to severe damage to the
LOCK/OFF. transmission.
4. Install fuse 32, the Discrete Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive
Logic Ignition Switch fuse. See Vehicles)
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
page 9‑37.
be towed with two wheels on the
5. Start the engine and let it idle for ground. To properly tow these
more than three minutes before vehicles, they should be placed on
driving the vehicle. a platform trailer with all four wheels To tow the vehicle from the front
Notice: Too much or too little off of the ground or dinghy towed with the rear wheels on the ground,
fluid can damage the from the front. do the following:
transmission. Be sure that the 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
transmission fluid is at the proper
level before towing with all four 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
wheels on the ground. 3. Set the parking brake.

Vehicle Care 9-75
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Appearance Care

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the Exterior Care
vehicle and dolly for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Towing the Vehicle From Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
the Rear soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
Finish Care
repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing
the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be
the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

9-76 Vehicle Care
Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal should not be used on plastic
aggressive polishing on a Parts parts, do not use it on the vehicle
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be or damage may occur and it
may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their would not be covered by the
non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use warranty.
that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or Do not use cleaning agents that are
clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. petroleum based or that contain
vehicle. acid or abrasives, as they can
Use special care with aluminum
Foreign materials such as calcium trim. To avoid damaging protective damage the paint, metal or plastic
chloride and other salts, ice melting trim, never use auto or chrome on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, polish, steam or caustic soap to products can be obtained from your
bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of wax, dealer. Follow all manufacturer
industrial chimneys, etc., can rubbed to high polish, is directions regarding correct product
damage the vehicle's finish if they recommended for all bright metal usage, necessary safety
remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. precautions and appropriate
the vehicle as soon as possible. disposal of any vehicle care
If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle product.
cleaners that are marked safe for Rinse the vehicle well, before
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
painted surfaces to remove foreign washing and after to remove all
keep it clean by washing it often.
matter. cleaning agents completely. If they
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
Exterior painted surfaces are are allowed to dry on the surface,
sunlight and use a car
subject to aging, weather and they could stain.
washing soap.
chemical fallout that can take their Dry the finish with a soft, clean
toll over a period of years. To keep Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
the paint finish looking new, keep chemicals that can damage the
avoid surface scratches and water
the vehicle garaged or covered emblems or nameplates on the
spotting.
whenever possible. vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it

Vehicle Care 9-77
High pressure car washes could Wheels and Trim — Aluminum wheel(s). The repairs would not
cause water to enter the vehicle. or Chrome be covered by the vehicle
Avoid using high pressure washes warranty. Use only approved
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the The vehicle may have either cleaners on aluminum or
surface of the vehicle. Use of power aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. chrome-plated wheels.
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa Keep the wheels clean using a soft The surface of these wheels is
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean cloth with mild soap and similar to the painted surface of the
removal of paint and decals. water. Rinse with clean water. After vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
Notice: Conveyor systems on rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft chemicals, abrasive polishes,
some automatic car washes could clean towel. A wax may then be abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
damage the vehicle. There may applied. acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
not be enough clearance for the Notice: Chrome wheels and on them because the surface could
undercarriage. Check with the car other chrome trim may be be damaged. Do not use chrome
wash manager before using the damaged if the vehicle is not polish on aluminum wheels.
automatic car wash. washed after driving on roads Notice: Using chrome polish on
that have been sprayed with aluminum wheels could damage
Weatherstrips magnesium, calcium or sodium the wheels. The repairs would not
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will chloride. These chlorides are be covered by the vehicle
make them last longer, seal better, used on roads for conditions warranty. Use chrome polish on
and not stick or squeak. Apply such as ice and dust. Always chrome wheels only.
silicone grease with a clean cloth. wash the vehicle's chrome with
During very cold, damp weather soap and water after exposure. Use chrome polish only on
frequent application may be chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
Notice: Using strong soaps, any painted surface of the wheel,
required. See Recommended Fluids chemicals, abrasive polishes,
and Lubricants on page 10‑7. and buff off immediately after
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners application.
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
9-78 Vehicle Care
Notice: Driving the vehicle Wipers can be damaged by: Original manufacturer replacement
through an automatic car wash . Extreme dusty conditions parts will provide the corrosion
that has silicone carbide tire protection while maintaining the
cleaning brushes, could damage . Sand and salt vehicle warranty.
the aluminum or chrome-plated . Heat and sun
wheels. The repairs would not be Finish Damage
. Snow and ice, without proper
covered by the vehicle warranty. Any stone chips, fractures or deep
Never drive a vehicle that has removal scratches in the finish should be
aluminum or chrome-plated Tires repaired right away. Bare metal will
wheels through an automatic car corrode quickly and may develop
wash that uses silicone carbide Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to into major repair expense.
tire cleaning brushes. clean the tires.
Minor chips and scratches can be
Windshield and Wiper Blades Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired with touch-up materials
tire dressing products on the available from your dealer. Larger
Clean the outside of the windshield vehicle may damage the paint areas of finish damage can be
with glass cleaner. finish and/or tires. When applying corrected in your dealer's body
Clean the rubber blades using a lint a tire dressing, always wipe off and paint shop.
free cloth or paper towel soaked any overspray from all painted
with windshield washer fluid or a surfaces on the vehicle. Underbody Maintenance
mild detergent. Wash the windshield Sheet Metal Damage Chemicals used for ice and snow
thoroughly when cleaning the removal and dust control can collect
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and If the vehicle is damaged and on the underbody. If these are not
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax requires sheet metal repair or removed, corrosion and rust can
treatments may cause wiper replacement, make sure the body develop on the underbody parts
streaking. Replace the wiper blades repair shop applies anti-corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
if they are worn or damaged. material to parts repaired or and exhaust system even though
replaced to restore corrosion they have corrosion protection.
protection.

Vehicle Care 9-79
At least every spring, flush these plastic surfaces. Stains should be Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
materials from the underbody with removed quickly as extreme heat when cleaning glass surfaces on
plain water. Clean any areas could cause them to set rapidly. the vehicle, could scratch the
where mud and debris can collect. Lighter colored interiors may require glass and/or cause damage to the
Dirt packed in close areas of the more frequent cleaning. rear window defogger. When
frame should be loosened before Newspapers and garments that can cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
being flushed. Your dealer or an transfer color to home furnishings use only a soft cloth and glass
underbody car washing system can can also transfer color to the cleaner.
do this. vehicle's interior. Cleaners can contain solvents that
Chemical Paint Spotting Remove dust from small buttons can become concentrated in the
and knobs with a small brush with vehicle's interior. Before using
Some weather and atmospheric cleaners, read and adhere to all
conditions can create a chemical soft bristles.
safety instructions on the label.
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall Your dealer has products for While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
upon and attack painted surfaces on cleaning the vehicle's interior. When maintain adequate ventilation by
the vehicle. This damage can take cleaning the vehicle's interior, only opening the vehicle's doors and
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped use cleaners specifically designed windows.
discolorations, and small, irregular for the surfaces that are being
dark spots etched into the paint cleaned. Permanent damage can Do not clean the interior using the
surface. result from using cleaners on following cleaners or techniques:
surfaces for which they were not . Never use a knife or any other
Interior Care intended. Apply the cleaner directly sharp object to remove a soil
to the cleaning cloth to prevent from any interior surface.
The vehicle's interior will continue to
over-spray. Remove any accidental . Never use a stiff brush. It can
look its best if it is cleaned often.
over-spray from other surfaces cause damage to the vehicle's
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
immediately. interior surfaces.
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and

9-80 Vehicle Care
. Never apply heavy pressure or Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the
rub aggressively with a cleaning soil and gently rub toward the
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
center. Continue cleaning, using
damage the interior and does brush attachment to remove dust
a clean area of the cloth each
not improve the effectiveness of and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
time it becomes soiled.
soil removal. with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and 4. Continue to gently rub the
. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area.
Avoid laundry detergents or always try to remove them first with
dishwashing soaps with 5. If the soil is not completely
plain water or club soda. Before removed, use a mild soap
degreasers. Using too much cleaning, gently remove as much of
soap will leave a residue that solution and repeat the cleaning
the soil as possible using one of the process with plain water.
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. following techniques:
For liquid cleaners, about If any of the soil remains, a
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
. For liquids: gently blot the commercial fabric cleaner or spot
water is a good guide. remaining soil with a paper lifter may be necessary. Test a small
towel. Allow the soil to absorb hidden area for colorfastness before
. Do not heavily saturate the into the paper towel until no
upholstery while cleaning. using a commercial upholstery
more can be removed. cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
. Damage to the vehicle's interior . For solid dry soils: remove as cleaned area gives any impression
may result from the use of many much as possible and then that a ring formation may result,
organic solvents such as naptha, vacuum. clean the entire surface.
alcohol, etc.
To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
carpet after the cleaning process.
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.

Vehicle Care 9-81
Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may

Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument
To remove dust, a soft cloth
panel. The increase in gloss may
dampened with water can be used. To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the
If a more thorough cleaning is dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult
necessary, a soft cloth dampened If a more thorough cleaning is to see through the windshield under
with a mild soap solution can be necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions.
used. Allow the leather to dry dampened with a mild soap solution
naturally. Do not use heat, steam, can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts
or spot lifters or spot removers, and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
or shoe polish on leather. Many Keep belts clean and dry.
removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial leather cleaners and commercial cleaners and coatings
coatings that are sold to preserve that are sold to preserve and protect { WARNING
and protect leather may soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
appearance and feel of the leather appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In
and are not recommended. Do not and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to
use silicone or wax-based products, use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection.
or those containing organic solvents or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild
to clean the vehicle's interior to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water.
because they can alter the because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner. in a non-uniform manner.

9-82 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES

Service and Maintenance 10-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 maintenance in this section. We
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement recommend having your dealer
on page 8‑24.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 perform these services. Proper
. Are driven on reasonable road
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
Maintenance Records the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10 condition, improves fuel economy, limits.
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.

10-2 Service and Maintenance
. Are driven off-road in the Your dealer has specially trained
recommended manner. See service technicians, uses genuine
Scheduled
Off-Road Driving on page 8‑8. replacement parts, as well as, up to Maintenance
. Use the recommended fuel. See date tools and equipment to ensure
Recommended Fuel on fast and accurate diagnostics. When the Change Engine Oil
page 8‑54. Soon Message Displays
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are Change engine oil and filter. See
{ WARNING listed in Recommended Fluids and Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
Lubricants on page 10‑7 and
Performing maintenance work can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
be dangerous. Some jobs can page 10‑9. We recommend the use Soon message displays, service
cause serious injury. Perform of genuine parts from your dealer. is required for the vehicle as
maintenance work only if you soon as possible, within the next
Rotation of New Tires
have the required know-how and 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
the proper tools and equipment. To maintain ride, handling, and the best conditions, the engine oil
If in doubt, see your dealer to performance of the vehicle, it is life system might not indicate the
have a qualified technician do the important that the first rotation need for vehicle service for more
work. See Doing Your Own service for new tires be performed than a year. The engine oil and filter
Service Work on page 9‑4. when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km must be changed at least once a
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire year and the oil life system must be
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 9‑52. reset. Your dealer has trained
that you will receive the highest service technicians who will perform
level of service available. this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life

system whenever the oil is changed.

. Windshield washer fluid level Maintenance II
See Engine Oil Life System on check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑21.
. Perform all services described in
page 9‑11.
Maintenance I.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
. Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑46.
. Steering and suspension
message displays, certain services,
inspection. Visual inspection for
checks, and inspections are . Tire wear inspection. See Tire damaged, loose, or missing
required. The services described for Inspection on page 9‑52. parts or signs of wear.
Maintenance I should be performed
at every engine oil change. The
. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation . Engine cooling system
services described for Maintenance on page 9‑52. inspection. Visual inspection of
II should be performed when: . Fluids visual leak check (or hoses, pipes, fittings, and
every 12 months, whichever clamps and replacement,
. Maintenance I was performed
occurs first). A leak in any if needed.
the last time the engine oil was
changed. system must be repaired and the . Windshield wiper blade
fluid level checked. inspection for wear, cracking,
. It has been 10 months or more . Engine air cleaner filter or contamination and windshield
since the Change Engine Oil
inspection (vehicles driven in and wiper blade cleaning,
Soon message has displayed or
dusty conditions only). See if contaminated. See Exterior
since the last service.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Care on page 9‑75. Worn or
Maintenance I page 9‑13. damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
. Change engine oil and filter. See . Brake system inspection (or
Replacement on page 9‑26.
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An every 12 months, whichever
Emission Control Service. occurs first).
. Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 9‑15.

. Body hinges and latches, key . Passenger compartment air Once a Year
lock cylinders, folding seat filter replacement (or every
hardware, and sunroof (if 12 months, whichever comes
. See Starter Switch Check on
equipped) lubrication. See first). More frequent replacement page 9‑25.
Recommended Fluids and may be required if vehicle is . See Automatic Transmission
Lubricants on page 10‑7. More driven regularly under dusty Shift Lock Control System
frequent lubrication may be conditions. Check on page 9‑25.
required when vehicle is .
Additional Required Services See Ignition Transmission Lock
exposed to a corrosive
Check on page 9‑25.
environment. Applying silicone At Each Fuel Stop
grease on weatherstrips with a . See Park Brake and P (Park)
clean cloth makes them last
. Engine oil level check. See Mechanism Check on
longer, seal better, and not stick Engine Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑26.
or squeak. . Engine coolant level check. See . Engine cooling system and
. Restraint system component Engine Coolant on page 9‑15. pressure cap pressure check.
check. See Safety System . Windshield washer fluid level Radiator and air conditioning
Check on page 2‑21. check. See Washer Fluid on condenser outside cleaning. See
. page 9‑21. Cooling System on page 9‑14.
Automatic transmission fluid
level check and adding fluid, Once a Month
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
if needed. See Automatic shields inspection for loose or
. Tire inflation check. See Tire
Transmission Fluid on damaged components.
page 9‑12. Pressure on page 9‑46.
. Accelerator pedal check for
. Engine air cleaner filter
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire damage, high effort, or binding.
inspection. See Engine Air Inspection on page 9‑52. Replace if needed.
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13.

First Engine Oil Change After

. Transfer case fluid change First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles (severe service) for vehicles Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
mainly driven in hilly or
. Fuel system inspection for mountainous terrain, when
. Engine cooling system drain,
damage or leaks. frequently towing a trailer, flush, and refill, cooling system
or used for taxi, police, and cap pressure check, and
First Engine Oil Change After cleaning of outside of radiator
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles or delivery service.
and air conditioning condenser
. Engine air cleaner filter First Engine Oil Change After (or every 5 years, whichever
replacement. See Engine Air Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles occurs first). See Cooling
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13. . Automatic transmission fluid System on page 9‑14. An
. Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See Emission Control Service.
change (severe service) for Automatic Transmission Fluid on . Engine accessory drive belt
vehicles mainly driven in heavy page 9‑12. inspection for fraying, excessive
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly . Transfer case fluid change cracks, or obvious damage and
or mountainous terrain, when (normal service). replacement, if needed. An
frequently towing a trailer, Emission Control Service.
. Spark plug replacement. An
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See Emission Control Service.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑12.

Maintenance
Service Maintenance I II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •
Engine coolant level check. • •
Windshield washer fluid level check. • •
Tire inflation pressures check. • •
Tire wear inspection. • •
Rotate tires. • •
Fluids visual leak check. • •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •
Brake system inspection. • •
Steering and suspension inspection. •
Engine cooling system inspection. •
Windshield wiper blades inspection. •
Body components lubrication. •
Restraint system components check. •
Automatic transmission fluid level check. •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
Engine Oil
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑15.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(V6 engines only)
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Release Pawl LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668, in
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —
Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading

Technical Data 11-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label
corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the inside of the glove
the left side of the vehicle. It can be box, has the following information:
seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification
outside. The VIN also appears on
Number (VIN)
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation
and registration. . Paint information
. Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.

11-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal
3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal

Technical Data 11-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 170 Y 125 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑12 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 W Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6 Y Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)

11-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine

Customer Information 12-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-16 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.

12-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Program using the toll-free
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification Number out of court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
(VIN). This is available from the by the Council of Better Business
vehicle registration or title, or the Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of
instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, the General Motors Customer call the toll-free number for
General Motors of Canada Limited Communication Centre, assistance. However, if a customer
wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited United States — Customer
The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication
of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Motor Division
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Customer
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Assistance Center
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive P.O. Box 33170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Detroit, MI 48232-5170
may include an informal hearing www.Chevrolet.com
before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-222-1020
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
you file your complaint to the final Telephone devices (TTYs))
decision, should be completed in Roadside Assistance:
about 70 days. We believe our 1-800-243-8872
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.

From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America and Chevrolet by dialing:

1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries 1-800-833-2438. (TTY users in
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:

Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance Online Owner Center
1-800-496-9994
General Motors de Mexico, Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
Canada — Customer S. de R.L. de C.V. www.gmownercenter.com/
Assistance Customer Assistance Center chevrolet
Av. Ejercito Nacional # 843
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada Information and services
Customer Communication Centre, C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. customized for your specific
CA1-163-005 vehicle — all in one convenient
1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800 place.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 . Digital owner manual, warranty
www.gm.ca
information, and more
1-800-263-3777 (English) Customer Assistance for
. Online service and maintenance
1-800-263-7854 (French) Text Telephone (TTY) records
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Users
Telephone devices (TTYs)) . Find Chevrolet dealers for
Roadside Assistance: To assist customers who are deaf, service nationwide
1-800-268-6800 hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
. Exclusive privileges and offers
Overseas — Customer (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY . Recall notices for your specific
Assistance equipment available at its Customer vehicle
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in . OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Please contact the local General
the U.S. can communicate with Services Earnings summaries
Motors Business Unit.

Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers. This program, available to qualified
My GM Canada (Canada) — applicants for cost reimbursement of
. My Driveway: Access quick links
www.gm.ca to parts and service estimates, eligible aftermarket adaptive
My GM Canada is a check trade-in values, equipment required for your vehicle,
password-protected section of or schedule a service such as hand controls or a
www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the wheelchair/scooter lift for the
information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your vehicle.
personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. For more information on the limited
tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your offer visit www.gmmobility.com or
profile and use tools and forms call the GM Mobility Assistance
with greater ease. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada 1-800-833-9935.
section within www.gm.ca.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
Program delivery date of the vehicle times.
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call . Description of the problem
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text telephone Services Provided
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
For Canadian purchased vehicles, Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the
call 1-800-268-6800. 100,000 miles (160 000 km), vehicle to get to the nearest
whichever comes first. service station.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year. In the U.S., anyone driving the . Lock‐Out Service: Service is
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a provided to unlock the vehicle if
Calling for Assistance person driving the vehicle without you are locked out. A remote
permission from the owner is not unlock may be available if you
When calling Roadside Assistance,
covered. have OnStar®. For security
have the following information
reasons, the driver must present
ready: Roadside Assistance is not a part of identification before this service
. Your name, home address, and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. is given.
home telephone number Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow From a Public
. Telephone number of your make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to the
location the Roadside Assistance program at nearest Chevrolet dealer for
. Location of the vehicle any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
. Model, year, color, and license Chevrolet and General Motors of driven. Assistance is also given
plate number of the vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to when the vehicle is stuck in the
limit services or payment to an sand, mud, or snow.
owner or driver if they decide the

. Flat Tire Change: Service is Services Specific to Canadian Canada Limited requires
provided to change a flat tire Purchased Vehicles pre-authorization, original
with the spare tire. The spare detailed receipts, and a copy of
tire, if equipped, must be in good . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement the repair orders. Once
condition and properly inflated. is approximately $5 Canadian. authorization has been received,
It is the owner's responsibility for Diesel fuel delivery may be the Roadside Assistance advisor
the repair or replacement of the restricted. Propane and other will help you make arrangements
tire if it is not covered by the fuels are not provided through and explain how to receive
warranty. this service. payment.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
. Battery Jump Start: Service is . Alternative Service: If
provided to jump start a dead registration is required. assistance cannot be provided
battery. . Trip Routing Service: Detailed right away, the Roadside
Services Not Included in maps of North America are Assistance advisor may give you
provided when requested either permission to get local
Roadside Assistance emergency road service. You will
with the most direct route or the
. Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a receive payment, up to $100,
violation of any laws. limit of six requests per year. after sending the original receipt
. Legal fines. Additional travel information is to Roadside Assistance.
also available. Allow three Mechanical failures may be
. Mounting, dismounting or weeks for delivery. covered, however any cost for
changing of snow tires, chains, parts and labor for repairs not
or other traction devices.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
covered by the warranty are the
Assistance: Must be over
. Towing or services for vehicles owner responsibility.
250 kilometres from where
driven on a non-public road or your trip was started to
highway. qualify. General Motors of

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments Program Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating
to minimize your inconvenience by
dealer and request an appointment. dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
providing several transportation
By scheduling a service Transportation, a customer support
options. Depending on the
appointment and advising your program for vehicles with the New
circumstances, your dealer can offer
service consultant of your Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base
you one of the following:
transportation needs, your dealer Warranty Coverage period in
can help minimize your Canada) and extended powertrain, Shuttle Service
inconvenience. and hybrid specific warranty in both
Shuttle service is the preferred
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled the U.S. and Canada.
means of offering Courtesy
into the service department Several courtesy transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in you with shuttle service to get you
can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when to your destination with minimal
unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. interruption of your daily schedule.
safety-related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a This includes one‐way or round trip
your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited shuttle service within reasonable
know this, and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet time and distance parameters of the
If the dealer requests you to bring entitled “Warranty and Owner dealer's area.
the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished
urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides
day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage
same day repair. information.

Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program

Reimbursement Your dealer may arrange to provide Information
If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is every dealer. Please contact
dealer's shuttle service, the expense kept for an overnight warranty your dealer for specific information
must be supported by original repair. Rental reimbursement will be about availability. All Courtesy
receipts and can only be up to the limited and must be supported by Transportation arrangements will be
maximum amount allowed by GM original receipts. This requires that administered by appropriate dealer
for shuttle service. In addition, for you sign and complete a rental personnel.
U.S. customers, should you arrange agreement and meet state/
transportation through a friend or provincial, local, and rental vehicle General Motors reserves the right to
relative, limited reimbursement for provider requirements. unilaterally modify, change or
reasonable fuel expenses may be Requirements vary and may include discontinue Courtesy Transportation
available. Claim amounts should minimum age requirements, at any time and to resolve all
reflect actual costs and be insurance coverage, credit card, etc. questions of claim eligibility
supported by original receipts. See You are responsible for fuel usage pursuant to the terms and
your dealer for information regarding charges and may also be conditions described herein at its
the allowance amounts for responsible for taxes, levies, usage sole discretion.
reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental
transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts parts are not covered by your GM
may also be used for repair. These New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from any vehicle failure related to such
collision and it is damaged, have the vehicles that were total losses in parts are not covered by that
damage repaired by a qualified prior crashes. In most cases, the warranty.
technician using the proper parts being recycled are from
equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. Repair Facility
parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM GM also recommends that you
repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice choose a collision repair facility that
resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally meets your needs before you ever
performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety need collision repairs. Your dealer
in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of may have a collision repair center
Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts with GM-trained technicians and
are not covered by your GM New state of the art equipment, or be
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any able to recommend a collision repair
parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by center that has GM-trained
and construction methods as the that warranty. technicians and comparable
parts with which your vehicle was equipment.
originally built. Genuine GM Aftermarket collision parts are also
Collision parts are your best choice available. These are made by Insuring Your Vehicle
to ensure that your vehicle's companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your Protect your investment in your GM
designed appearance, durability, vehicle with comprehensive and
and safety are preserved. The use vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature collision insurance coverage. There
of Genuine GM parts can help are significant differences in the
maintain your GM New Vehicle durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in quality of coverage afforded by
Limited Warranty. various insurance policy terms.
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket

Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs

. Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to your GM Number (VIN)
If there has been an injury, call
vehicle by limiting compensation for . Insurance company and policy
emergency services for help. Do not
damage repairs by using number
leave the scene of a crash until all
aftermarket collision parts. Some
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the
insurance companies will not
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle
specify aftermarket collision parts.
puts you in danger, or you are
When purchasing insurance, we Choose a reputable repair facility
instructed to move it by a police
recommend that you assure your that uses quality replacement parts.
officer.
vehicle will be repaired with GM See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information section.
If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What
available from your current in the crash.
Will You See After an Airbag
insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 2‑28.
to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing page 12‑6. Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have Repair Process
Gather the following information:
insurance that assures repairs with In the event that your vehicle
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver's name, address, phone requires damage repairs, GM
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or number recommends that you take an active
Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver's license number role in its repair. If you have a
parts. Read your lease carefully, as pre-determined repair facility of
you may be charged at the end of
. Owner's name, address, phone
number choice, take your vehicle there,
your lease for poor quality repairs. or have it towed there. Specify to
. Vehicle license plate the facility that any required
. Vehicle make, model and replacement collision parts be
model year original equipment parts, either new

Genuine GM parts or recycled Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,

original GM parts. Remember, Owner Manual, and Warranty
recycled parts will not be covered by
Ordering Information Booklet.
your GM vehicle warranty. Service Manuals RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
but you must live with the repair. and repair information on engines, Without Portfolio: Owner
Depending on your policy limits, transmission, axle, suspension, Manual only.
your insurance company may brakes, electrical, steering,
initially value the repair using body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE:
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
your repair professional, and insist Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if Service Bulletins give additional
your vehicle is leased you may be Forms
technical service information
obligated to have the vehicle needed to knowledgeably service Technical Service Bulletins and
repaired with Genuine GM parts, General Motors cars and trucks. Manuals are available for current
even if your insurance coverage Each bulletin contains instructions and past model GM vehicles. To
does not pay the full cost. to assist in the diagnosis and request an order form, specify year
If another party's insurance service of your vehicle. and model name of the vehicle.
company is paying for the repairs, ORDER TOLL FREE:
you are not obligated to accept a Owner Information
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
repair valuation based on that Owner publications are written 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
insurance company's collision policy specifically for owners and intended
repair limits, as you have no For Credit Card Orders Only
to provide basic operational
contractual limits with that company. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
information about the vehicle.
In such cases, you can have control Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
The owner manual includes the
of the repair and parts choices as at: helminc.com
Maintenance Schedule for all
long as cost stays within reasonable models.
limits.

Or you can write to: Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Helm, Incorporated become involved in individual
P.O. Box 07130
Defects problems between you, your
Detroit, MI 48207 dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
Prices are subject to change without To contact NHTSA, you may call
notice and without incurring to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
obligation. Allow ample time for Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
delivery. 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
If you believe that your vehicle
Note to Canadian Customers: All has a defect which could cause www.safercar.gov; or write to:
listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or Administrator, NHTSA
funds. Canadian residents are to death, you should immediately
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
inform the National Highway Washington D.C. 20590
Traffic Safety Administration
You can also obtain other
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
information about motor vehicle
General Motors.
safety from http://
If NHTSA receives similar www.safercar.gov.
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that your vehicle has a this, please notify General Motors. Your GM vehicle has a number of
safety defect, notify Transport sophisticated computers that record
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Canada immediately, in addition to information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven.
notifying General Motors of Canada
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, your vehicle uses
Limited. Call them at
Center computer modules to monitor and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the
Road Safety Branch conditions for airbag deployment
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
2780 Sheffield Road and deploy airbags in a crash and,
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 if so equipped, to provide antilock
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store
Customer Communication Centre, data to help your dealer technician
CA1-163-005 service your vehicle. Some modules
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or,
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose if the vehicle is leased, with the
of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
crash or near crash-like situations, to an official request of police or
such as an airbag deployment or crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
hitting a road obstacle, data that will GM's defense of litigation through
assist in understanding how a driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and the discovery process; or, as
vehicle's systems performed. The required by law. Data that GM
EDR is designed to record data crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law collects or receives may also be
related to vehicle dynamics and used for GM research needs or may
safety systems for a short period of enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of be made available to others for
time, typically 30 seconds or less. research purposes, where a need is
The EDR in this vehicle is designed personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
to record such data as: specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
investigation.
. How various systems in your
vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such as
. How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the
pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
brake pedal information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling

OnStar® Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If your vehicle has OnStar and you Identification (RFID) Statement
subscribe to the OnStar services, RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
please refer to the OnStar Terms vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
and Conditions for information on pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
data collection and use. See also system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
OnStar® System on page 4‑39 in connection with conveniences such Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
this manual for more information. as key fobs for remote door locking/ Industry Canada.
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
Navigation System in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
If your vehicle has a navigation door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
system, use of the system may
personal information or link with any interference.
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
other trip information. Refer to the personal information. interference received, including
navigation system operating manual interference that may cause
for information on stored data and undesired operation of the
for deletion instructions. device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Will You See After System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-25 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Airbags Assistance Program,
Adding Equipment to the
Adding Equipment to the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-35
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-15 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-13
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Automatic Climate Control
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Alarm System System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Airbag System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-35
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-24 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
How Does an Airbag
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Antenna Shiftlock Control System
Passenger Sensing
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31
What Makes an Airbag
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-32

i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cargo

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-33 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Cautions, Danger, and
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . .9-32 CD
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-26
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 C Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
California Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-16
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 Check
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Perchlorate Materials Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-25
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Child Restraints
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Infants and Young
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Capacities and Lower Anchors and
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-31
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-45
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Carbon Monoxide Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-54
Headlamps, Front Turn
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-43
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

INDEX i-3
Cleaning Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 Door

Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 7-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Drive Systems
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-10 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-24
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Text Telephone (TTY) Driver Information
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 Customer Information Driving
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Service Publications Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12 Characteristics and
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Customer Satisfaction Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Coolant D Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .8-20
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-23
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Daytime Running Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Courtesy Transportation Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Covers Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

i-4 INDEX
DVD Engine (cont.) F

Rear Seat Entertainment Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Filter
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33 Coolant Temperature
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-2
E Cooling System Messages . . .4-29
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Economy Mode Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Fluid
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-12
Electrical Equipment, Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Electrical System Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Engine Compartment Fuse Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-34
Fog Lamps
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-31
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Engine Oil
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Instrument Panel Fuse Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Front Seats
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Engine Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Check and Service Engine Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-54

INDEX i-5
Fuel (cont.) General Information Heater

Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-54 Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-22 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-20
Requirements, California . . . . .8-54 GM Mobility Reimbursement Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-41
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 H How to Wear Safety Belts
Engine Compartment Fuse Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-2 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Instrument Panel Fuse Headlamps I
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 Ignition Transmission Lock
G Daytime Running Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Gasoline Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Infants and Young Children,
Gauges Headlamps, Front Turn Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Engine Coolant Signal, Sidemarker, and Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 Instrument Panel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-1 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-23 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning Lights and Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

i-6 INDEX
J LATCH System Lights (cont.)

Replacing Parts After a High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Latch, Lower Anchors and Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-14
K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-31 Liftgate Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Keyless Entry Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Traction Control System
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3 Light (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Lighting Locks
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
L Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Lights Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Lamps Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2 Antilock Brake System Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-22
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 for Children (LATCH
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-16 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-22 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

INDEX i-7
M Messages (cont.) N
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Maintenance Navigation System
Object Detection System . . . . .4-31
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle Data Recording
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Maintenance Schedule and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Recommended Fluids and Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-16
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 O
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Object Detection System
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Mirrors
Messages Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-32 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Battery Voltage and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Oil
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 9-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Monitor System, Tire
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-29 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-37
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

i-8 INDEX
Operation, Infotainment Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-30 R

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Perchlorate Materials
Radio Frequency
Outlets Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Phone
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Bluetooth . . . . . . . 6-42, 6-43,
Radios
Overview 6-46, 6-58
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Power
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Overview, Infotainment Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
P Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-29
Rear Seat Entertainment
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Park System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-49
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-8
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Parking Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Privacy
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Radio Frequency
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16
Brake and P (Park) Recommended Fluids and
Program
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-33 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Proposition 65 Warning,
Passenger Airbag Status Records
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

INDEX i-9
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-72 Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting
Reimbursement Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Roadside Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Roof Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Running the Vehicle While Seats
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-36 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Replacing LATCH System Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 S Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-5
System Parts After a Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-3
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Securing Child
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51, 2-54
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Security
Retained Accessory Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-22 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-21

i-10 INDEX
Service Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps

Accessories and Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Signals, Turn and Storage
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Spare Tire Storage Areas
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Maintenance, General Specifications and Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Publications Ordering StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Servicing the Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-34 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Shifting Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 System
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 System Check
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont.) Traction

Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-47 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-41
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Control System (TCS)/
Taillamps
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Terminology and Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Trailer
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-13
Uniform Tire Quality Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-64
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-10
Wheel Alignment and Tire Transmission
Tires
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
When It Is Time for New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Transportation Program,
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Towing Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-58 Turn and Lane-Change
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-57 Turn Signal
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-49
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-64
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72

i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle Identification Wheels

Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Alignment and Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-46
Service Parts Identification Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Uniform Tire Quality
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicle Reminder Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 When It Is Time for New
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
V Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Where to Put the Child
Vehicle Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
W Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Windshield
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-26
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Wipers
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

2010 Equinox

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Equinox

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Motors of Canada Limited” for

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the Manufactured under license from

Canadian Vehicle Owners Danger, Warnings, and

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Keys, Doors and Doors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Keys and Locks

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Shutting the Engine Off After a

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Doors Do not press the touchpad while

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

be in P (Park) to use the power

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

mounted cargo during power

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors To adjust the mirrors:

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

The driver door also has switches Programming the Power

Uplevel shown, base similar

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Window Lockout Roof

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Express-open/Express-close Anti-Pinch Feature Dirt and debris may collect on the

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .

Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Child Restraints

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Front Seats WARNING (Continued)

Seat Adjustment pedal when you do not want to.

To adjust the seat position:

You can lose control of the B: Power Seat Adjustment

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Adjust the seatback by moving the A second seating and mirror

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

To stop recall movement of the RKE Lumbar Adjustment WARNING (Continued)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Power Reclining Seatbacks

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Heated Front Seats Remote Start Heated Seats

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Rear Seats WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING Notice: Folding a rear seat with

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

To slide the entire seat forward or Safety Belts